Heat Tracing Catalog Data

ELECTRICAL HEAT
TRACING MATERIALS
HTSX TM
Self-Regulating Heating Cable Product Specifications
Application . . .
Process Temperature Maintenance or Freeze Protection 1
HTSX self-regulating heating cables are designed specifically
for process temperature maintenance or freeze protection
where high temperature exposure capability is required. 2
HTSX withstands the temperature exposures associated with
steam purging. 3
The heat output of HTSX cable varies in response to the sur-
rounding temperature. Variations in the ambient temperature
or heat lost through the thermal insulation are compensated
for automatically along the entire length of a heat-traced
pipe.
4
HTSX cables are certified for use in ordinary (nonclassified)
areas and in potentially explosive atomospheres in accor-
dance with the ATEX Directive and the IEC Ex Scheme.
Ratings . . .
Available watt densities ... 9, 18, 27, 37, 48, 64 W/m @ 10°C
Nominal supply voltages1 ......................................... 230 Vac
Max. maintenance temperature ....................................121°C Construction . . .
Max. exposure temperature
Intermittent power-on ..............................................215°C 1 Nickel-Plated Copper Bus Wires (1.3 mm2)
Intermittent power-off ..............................................250°C 2 Semiconductive Heating Matrix and
Continuous power-off ..............................................204°C Fluoropolymer Dielectric Insulation
Minimum installation temperature .................................-60°C 3 Tinned Copper Braid
Minimum bend radius 4 Fluoropolymer overjacket provides ad-
@ -15°C ................................................................. 10 mm ditional protection to cable and braid where
@ -60°C ................................................................ 32 mm exposure to chemicals or corrosives is
T-rating2 ................................................................................. expected.
HTSX 3-2, 6-2, 9-2, 12-2, 15-2 ..................................... T3
HTSX 20-2 .................................................................... T2 Product Features . . .
Based on stabilized design3 .................................T3 to T6
• Withstands continuous flammability testing
Basic Accessories . . . 4 according to IEC 60332-1: 1993
• Can be installed at temperatures to -60°C
Power Connection: All HTSX cables require a TBX-4L power
connection boot for terminating the circuit before connect-
ing to power.
End-of-Circuit Termination: HTSX cables require the ET-8
end cap and ET-80 overcap for terminating at the end of the
circuit.
Notes . . .
1. Cable may be energised at other voltages; contact Thermon for design assistance.
2. T-rating per internationally recognised testing agency guidelines.
3. Thermon heating cables are approved for the listed T-ratings using the stabilised
design method. This enables the cable to operate in hazardous areas without limit-
ing thermostats. The T-rating may be determined using CompuTrace® Electric Heat
Tracing Design Software or contact Thermon for design assistance.
4. Information on additional accessories to complete a heater circuit installation and
to comply with approval requirements can be found in the “Self-Regulating Cables
Systems Accessories” product specification sheet (Form TEP0010U).
THERMON . . . The Heat Tracing Specialists®

www.thermon.com
European Headquarters Corporate Headquarters

Boezemweg 25 •
PO Box 205 100 Thermon Dr. •
PO Box 609 For the Thermon office nearest you
2640 AE Pijnacker •
The Netherlands San Marcos, TX 78667-0609 USA• visit us at . . .
Phone: +31 (0) 15-36 15 370 Phone: +1 512-396-5801 www.thermon.com
HTSX TM
Self-Regulating Heating Cable Product Specifications
Power Output Curves1 . . . Circuit Breaker Sizing and Type2 . . .

Maximum circuit lengths for various circuit breaker amper-
The power outputs shown apply to overjacketed cable in-
ages are shown below. Circuit breaker sizing and earth-fault
stalled on insulated metallic pipe at the service voltage stated
protection should be based on applicable local codes. For
below.
information on design and performance on other voltages,
Product Type Power Output at 10°C contact Thermon.
230 Vac Nominal W/m
Earth-fault protection of equipment should be provided for
HTSX 3-2 9 each branch circuit supplying electric heating equipment.
HTSX 6-2 18 Type B Circuit Breakers
HTSX 9-2 27 230 Vac Service Voltage Max. Circuit Length4 vs. Breaker Size
HTSX 12-2 37 Start-Up Metres
ProductType Temperature3
HTSX 15-2 48 °C 16 A 25 A 32 A
10 177 215 215
HTSX 20-2 64 HTSX 3-2
0 177 215 215
-20 171 215 215
-40 134 215 215
HTSX at 230 Vac 10 114 152 152
0 114 152 152
70 HTSX 6-2
-20 114 152 152
-40 95 152 152
10 82 123 123
60 0 82 123 123
HTSX 9-2
HTSX 20-2 -20 82 123 123
-40 72 120 123
10 65 106 106
50 0 65 106 106
HTSX 12-2
-20 64 106 106
Watts per Meter
-40 57 94 106
40 HTSX 15-2 10 47 77 94
0 45 74 94
HTSX 15-2
-20 41 67 89
HTSX 12-2 -40 37 60 79
30 10 34 55 73
0 33 52 69
HTSX 20-2
HTSX 9-2 -20 30 48 62
20 -40 27 43 57
Type C Circuit Breakers
HTSX 6-2
10 230 Vac Service Voltage
Max. Circuit Length4 vs. Breaker Size
Start-Up Metres
HTSX 3-2
ProductType Temperature3
0 °C 16 A 25 A 32 A
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Pipe Temperature °C 10 177 215 215
0 177 215 215
HTSX 3-2
-20 171 215 215
-40 134 215 215
Certifications/Approvals . . . 10 114 152 152
0 114 152 152
European Organisation for Electrotechnical HTSX 6-2
-20 114 152 152
Standardisation -40 95 152 152
Ordinary and Hazardous (Classified) Locations 10 82 123 123
0 82 123 123
II 2 G/D Ex e II T3 DEMKO 02 ATEX 0120790 HTSX 9-2
-20 82 123 123
-40 73 123 123
International Electrotechnical Commission 10 65 106 106
IEC Ex IEC Certification Scheme for Explosive Atmospheres HTSX 12-2
0
-20
65
65
106
106
106
106
UL 06.0004
-40 58 96 106
10 47 77 94
Factory Mutual Research HTSX 15-2 0 47 77 94
Ordinary and Hazardous (Classified) Locations -20 47 76 94
-40 42 69 91
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 10 39 64 81
0 39 64 81
Hazardous (Classified) Locations HTSX 20-2
-20 36 59 78
-40 33 53 70
Note . . .
HTSX has additional hazardous area approvals including: 1. For more precise power output values as a function of pipe temperature, refer to CompuTrace®.
2. Maximum circuit lengths shown are based on an instantaneous trip current characteristic per IEC
• DNV • Lloyd’s • JIS • CCE/CMRS • GGTN 60898 at the referenced start-up temperature and a 10°C maintenance temperature. For maximum
circuit lengths with other trip current characteristics contact Thermon.
Contact Thermon for additional approvals and specific infor- 3. While a heat tracing system is generally designed to keep the contents of a pipe at the desired
mation. maintain temperature, the cable may be energized at lower temperatures. For design data with lower
start-up temperatures than represented above contact Thermon for design assistance.
4. The maximum circuit length is for one continuous length of cable, not the sum of segments of cable.
Refer to CompuTrace® design software or contact Thermon for current loading of segments.
Form TEP0074U-0508 © Thermon Manufacturing Co. Information subject to change.

Terminator TM
Heating Cable Termination Kits Product Specifications
Application . . .
Power Connection, In-Line/T-Splice, End Termination
Lighted Power Connection/End Termination 1
Terminator nonmetallic termination kits are designed spe-
cifically for rapid, trouble-free installation of Thermon self- 2
regulating, power-limiting, and series polymer insulated
heating cables. The integral design of these nonmetallic kits
combines the pipe-mounted fitting, heating cable grom-
met and cable strain relief into a single assembly. Screws 3
for securing the covers of the kits have been eliminated to
simplify cover installation while providing additional security
(a tool is required to remove the cover after installation).
Terminator kits are approved for use in ordinary (nonclassi-
4
fied) areas and hazardous (classified) areas. DS/DE Kit Shown
DP Kit Shown
Ratings/Specifications . . .
Enclosure rating ............................................ NEMA 4X, IP66 Construction . . .
Maximum pipe exposure temperature ............ 482°F (250°C)
1 Junction Box, Glass-Reinforced Polymer 1
Minimum installation temperature .................... -76°F (-60°C)
with DIN Rail Mounted Terminal Blocks
Operating ambient temp .....-76°F (-60°C) to +131°F (+55°C)
2 Splice Cap, Glass-Reinforced Polymer 1
Maximum voltage rating............................................ 600 Vac
3 Pipe-Mount Expediter, Glass-Reinforced
Product Reference Legend . . . Polymer 1
4 Stainless Steel Pipe Attachment Band
"D" Kits Division 2 and Zone 2 Areas
"Z" Kits Zone 1 Areas 5 Yellow Diode Indicating Lamp (Available on
Kits for BSX, RSX, HTSX, KSX, TSX, VSX, HPT and FP Cables
Kit Type DL or ZL only) not shown
DP or ZP = Power Connection Kit
DL or ZL = Lighted Power Connection/End Termination Kit
Certifications/Approvals . . .
DS/DE or ZS/ZE = In-Line Spllice or End Termination Kit
Kits for TEK and HTEK Cables Terminator kits have the following approvals when
DP-M or ZP-M = Power Connection Kit used in conjunction with Thermon heating cables:
FM Approvals
Ordinary Locations
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Notes . . . Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II (ZP, ZL, ZS/ZE only)
1. Electrostatic charge resistant glass reinforced polymer standard on ZP, ZL, ZS/ZE kits.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Ordinary Locations
Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II (ZP, ZL, ZS/ZE only)
Canadian Standards Association

Ordinary Locations
Ex e II (ZP, ZL, ZS/ZE only)
THERMON . . . The Heat Tracing Specialists®

100 Thermon Dr. •
PO Box 609 •
San Marcos, TX 78667-0609
Phone: 512-396-5801 •
Facsimile: 512-396-3627 •
1-800-820-HEAT
www.thermon.com In Canada call 1-800-563-8461
Terminator TM
Heating Cable Termination Kits Product Specifications
Terminator DP and ZP . . . Terminator DL and ZL . . . de- Terminator DS/DE and ZS/ZE . . . PETK . . . Circuit fabrication kits are
designed to fabricate power signed to provide visual indication designed to fabricate accessible required for use with all Thermon
connections, in-line/T-splice of an energized heating circuit. outside-the-insulation splices or Parallel Heating Cables Connection
connections or for making end The kit may be utilized as a power end terminations of Thermon Heat- Kits. Kits for termination of SX
terminations. Electrical connec- connection or an end termination ing Cables. Electrical connections cables include a power connection
tions are made in terminal blocks kit. Electrical connections are are made using wire fasteners. (For boot, end cap, RTV adhesive and
utilizing nickel-plated copper made in terminal blocks utilizing a caution label. Kits for termination
applications requiring terminations
of HPT and FP cables also include
terminals to ensure corrosion-free nickel-plated copper terminals to to be made with terminal block tape strip and a distinct grommet.
electrical integrity. ensure corrosion-free electrical connections, the Terminator DP or SCTK . . . Splice connection ter-
integrity. ZP kit may be used.) mination kits are required when
preparing outside-the-insulation
splices with all Thermon Paral-
lel Heating Cables Connection
Kits. Kits for terminations of SX
cables include 2 splice connection
boots, assorted wire nuts and RTV
adhesive. Kits for termination of
HPT and FP cables also include a
distinct grommet
Ratings/Specifications . . .
DP-M DS/DE
DP, ZP DL, ZL
ZP-M ZS/ZE
Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4X, IP66 NEMA 4X, IP66 NEMA 4X, IP66 NEMA 4X, IP66
Max. Pipe Exposure Temperature 482°F (250°C) 482°F (250°C) 482°F (250°C) 482°F (250°C)
Min. Installation Temperature -76°F (-60°C) -76°F (-60°C) -76°F (-60°C) -76°F (-60°C)
-76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F

Operating Ambient Temperature
(-60°C to +55°C) (-60°C to +55°C) (-60°C to +55°C) (-60°C to +55°C)
Electrical Connection Terminal Blocks3 Terminal Blocks4 Terminal Blocks6 Wire Fasteners
Number of Power Connections 1 to 3 Cables 1 Cable 1 Cable7 n/a
Number of In-Line/T-Splices 2 to 3 Cables 2 Cables n/a 2 Cables
1 Cable (DP)
Number of End Terminations 1 Cable 1 Cable 1 to 2 Cables
1 to 2 Cables (ZP)
Maximum Conductor Size1 8 AWG (10 mm2) 4 AWG (16 mm2) 8 AWG (10 mm2) n/a
Maximum Voltage Rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
Maximum Rated Current 1 50 Amps 85 Amps 50 Amps n/a
T4 @ 46 Amps T4 @ 11.5 W/ft5 T4 @ 46 Amps T4 @ 46 Amps

T-rating, Ta2 = 104°F (40°C)
T6 @ 22 Amps T6 @ 5.2 W/ft5 T6 @ 22 Amps T6 @ 22 Amps
Indicating Lamp Service Life Rating n/a n/a 100,000 Hours n/a
Indicating Lamp Operating Voltage Range n/a n/a 12 to 270 Vac8 n/a
Notes . . .
1. Alternate terminal block configurations are available, contact factory.
2. Higher ambient temperatures are possible. Consult Thermon for corresponding T-rating.
3. Terminator DP kit includes three terminal blocks (L1, L2 and G). Terminator ZP kit includes four line terminal blocks (two jumpered pairs, L1 and L2) and two ground terminal blocks (G).
4. Terminator DP-M kit includes four terminal blocks (L1, L2, L3 and G). Terminator ZP-M kit includes three line terminal blocks (L1, L2 and L3) and one ground terminal block (G).
5. T-Rating based on individual cable power output.
6. Terminator DL kit includes three terminal blocks (L1, L2 and G). Terminator ZL kit includes four line terminal blocks (two jumpered pairs, L1 and L2) and one ground terminal block (G).
7. Terminator DL kit allows up to 3 cables to be connected to power; additional TBX boots may be ordered separately.
8. Higher voltages (up to 500 Vac) are available, contact Thermon.
Form TEP0088-0406 © Thermon Manufacturing Co. Printed in U.S.A.

Í§-¬»³- ß½½»--±®·»-
Ì¸»®³±² Ø»¿¬ Ì®¿½·²¹ Ý¿¾´»-
Ó»¬¿´´·½ Ð±©»® Ý±²²»½¬·±²ô Í°´·½» ¿²¼ Û²¼ó±ºóÝ·®½«·¬ Ô·¹¸¬ Õ·¬- ò ò ò
Ì¸»®³±² ³»¬¿´´·½ ¿½½»--±®·»- «¬·´·¦» »°±¨§ó½±¿¬»¼ ¿´«³·²«³ ¶«²½¬·±² ¾±¨»- ¿²¼ »¨°»¼·¬»®- ¿²¼ ¿®» ¿°°®±ª»¼ º±® ±®¼·²¿®§ ¿²¼ Ü·ª·-·±² î ¸¿¦¿®¼±«-
´±½¿¬·±²-ò Ì¸» µ·¬- ¸¿ª» ¿ ³¿¨·³«³ °·°» »¨°±-«®» ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ®¿¬·²¹ ±º ìèîpÚ øîëðpÝ÷ ©·¬¸ ¿ ³·²·³«³ ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ±º óêðpÚ øóëïpÝ÷ò
ÛÝßóïòòò·- ¼»-·¹²»¼ º±® ½±²²»½¬·²¹ ±²» ±® ¬©± ÛÝÌóîòòò·-¼»-·¹²»¼º±®½±²²»½¬·²¹¬¸®»»¸»¿¬·²¹ ½¿¾´»- Ê×ÔóìÝòòò·- ¼»-·¹²»¼ ¬± °®±ª·¼» ª·-«¿´ ·²¼·½¿¬·±² ±º ¿²
¸»¿¬·²¹ ½¿¾´»- ¬± °±©»® ±® º±® -°´·½·²¹ ¬©± ½¿¾´»- ¬± °±©»® ±® º±® -°´·½·²¹ ¬¸®»» ½¿¾´»- ¬±¹»¬¸»®ò »²»®¹·¦»¼ ¸»¿¬·²¹ ½·®½«·¬ò ïîð Ê¿½ ø±°¬·±² ï÷ô îðè Ê¿½
¬±¹»¬¸»®ò Ì¸» ÛÝÌóî µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»-å »°±¨§ó½±¿¬»¼ ÒÛÓß ìÈñé ø±°¬·±² ì÷ô îìð Ê¿½ ø±°¬·±² î÷ ±® îéé Ê¿½ ø±°¬·±² í÷ò
Ì¸» ÛÝßóï µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»-å »°±¨§ó½±¿¬»¼ ÒÛÓß ìÈñé ¶«²½¬·±² ¾±¨ô °·°»ó³±«²¬»¼ »¨°»¼·¬»®ô ¬¸·®¼ ½¿¾´» Ì¸» Ê×ÔóìÝ µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»-å °·°»ó³±«²¬»¼ »¨°»¼·¬»®ô
¶«²½¬·±² ¾±¨ô °·°»ó³±«²¬»¼ »¨°»¼·¬»®ô î -¬¿·²´»-- »²¬®§ ¿--»³¾´§ô î -¬¿·²´»-- -¬»»´ °·°» ¿¬¬¿½¸³»²¬ ¿³¾»® ´·¹¸¬ ¿--»³¾´§ ·² ÒÛÓß ìÈ ¾±¨ô î -¬¿·²´»-- -¬»»´
-¬»»´ °·°» ¿¬¬¿½¸³»²¬ ¾¿²¼- º±® °·°·²¹ ìþ ±® ´»--ô ¾¿²¼- º±® °·°·²¹ ìþ ±® ´»--ô ¸»¿¬»® ½¿¾´» ¹®±³³»¬-ô í °·°» ¿¬¬¿½¸³»²¬ ¾¿²¼- º±® °·°·²¹ ìþ ±® ´»--ô ¸»¿¬»®
¸»¿¬»® ½¿¾´» ¹®±³³»¬ô î °±©»® ½±²²»½¬·±² ¾±±¬-ô ÎÌÊ °±©»® ½±²²»½¬·±² ¾±±¬-ô ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª»ô ©·®» º¿-¬»²»®- ½¿¾´» ¹®±³³»¬ô °±©»® ½±²²»½¬·±² ¾±±¬ô ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª»ô
¿¼¸»-·ª»ô ©·®» º¿-¬»²»®- ¿²¼ ¹®±«²¼·²¹ ´«¹ò ¿²¼ ¹®±«²¼·²¹ ´«¹ò î ®·²¹ ¬»®³·²¿´- ¿²¼ ¹®±«²¼·²¹ -°´·½» ´«¹ò
ÛÝßóïóÍÎ òòòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ØÌÍÈô ÕÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ ÛÝÌóîóÍÎ òòòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ØÌÍÈô ÕÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ Ê×ÔóìÝóÍÎ òòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ØÌÍÈô ÕÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ
ÛÝßóïóÆÒ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòÚÐô ØÐÌ ÛÝÌóîóÆÒ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòÚÐô ØÐÌ Ê×ÔóìÝóÆÒ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòÚÐô ØÐÌ
Ý¿¾´» Û²¼ Ì»®³·²¿¬·±² Õ·¬-ô ß¬¬¿½¸³»²¬ Ì¿°»- ¿²¼ Ó·-½»´´¿²»±«- ×¬»³- ò ò ò
ÐÛÌÕòòò½·®½«·¬ º¿¾®·½¿¬·±² µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»- ¿ °±©»® ¾±±¬ô ÛÌóêÝô ÛÌóéÝô ÛÌóèÝòòò»²¼ ¬»®³·²¿¬·±² µ·¬- ¿®» ÌÞÈóíÔÝô ÌÞÈóìÔÝòòò°±©»® ½±²²»½¬·±² ¾±±¬- ¿®»
»²¼ ½¿°ô ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª»ò ¼»-·¹²»¼ ¬± °®±°»®´§ ¬»®³·²¿¬» ¬¸» »²¼ ø¿©¿§ º®±³ «-»¼ ¬± °®»°¿®» ¸»¿¬·²¹ ½¿¾´» º±® ½±²²»½¬·±² ¬±
°±©»®÷ ±º ¿ ¸»¿¬ ¬®¿½·²¹ ½·®½«·¬ò Û¿½¸ µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»- ¿ °±©»®ò Õ·¬ ·²½´«¼»- ®«¾¾»® ¾±±¬ ¿²¼ ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª»ò
ÍÝÌÕòòò-°´·½» ½±²²»½¬·±²ñ¬»®³·²¿¬·±² µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»- ¿
®«¾¾»® »²¼ ½¿°ô ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª» ¿²¼ ½¿«¬·±² ´¿¾»´ò ÌÞÈóíÔÝ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ
°±©»® ¾±±¬ô ©·®»²«¬-ô ÎÌÊ ¿¼¸»-·ª»ò
ÛÌóêÝ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ ÌÞÈóìÔÝ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ØÌÍÈô ÕÍÈô ÚÐ ú ØÐÌ
ÐÛÌÕóïÜ ñ ÍÝÌÕóïÜ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ÞÍÈô ÎÍÈô ÌÍÈô ÊÍÈ
ÛÌóéÝ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ØÐÌ øÞÒ÷
ÐÛÌÕóîÜ ñ ÍÝÌÕóîÜ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ÕÍÈô ØÌÍÈ
ÛÌóèÝ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòò ØÌÍÈô ÕÍÈô ÚÐ ú ØÐÌ øÑÖ÷
ÐÛÌÕóíÜ ñ ÍÝÌÕóíÜ òòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòòÚÐô ØÐÌ
ÌÞóîÚô ÌÞóíÚô ÌÞóìÚòòò ÝÔòòòª·²§´ó¾¿-»¼ °»»´ ¿²¼ -¬·½µ ½¿«¬·±² ´¿¾»´- ¿®» ÚÌóïÔô ÚÌóïØòòò
·²-·¼» ³»¬¿´´·½ øÛÝßô ÛÝÌ÷ ¿²¼ ²±²ó³»¬¿´´·½ øÐÝßô ·²¬»²¼»¼ º±® ¼·®»½¬ »¨°±-«®» ¬± ·²¼«-¬®·¿´ »²ª·®±²ó ½¿¾´» ¬± °·°·²¹ »ª»®§ ïîþ øíð ½³÷ ±® ¿- ®»¯«·®»¼ ¾§
ÐÝÍ÷ ¶«²½¬·±² ¾±¨»-ò ³»²¬-ò Û´»½¬®·½¿´´§ ¸»¿¬»¼ °·°»´·²»- ¿²¼ ª»--»´- ¿®»
ÌÞóîÚ òòòòòòò îó°±·²¬ó®¿¬»¼ êëß à êðð Ê¿½ô îî ó ê ßÉÙ ßÔóîðÔô ßÔóîðØô ßÔóíðÔô ßÔóíðØòòò ¿´«³·²«³ ¬¿°»
ÌÞóíÚ òòòòòòò íó°±·²¬ó®¿¬»¼ êëß à êðð Ê¿½ô îî ó ê ßÉÙ ´¿¾»´- -¸±«´¼ ¾» °´¿½»¼ ¿¬ ïðùóîðù øíóê ³÷ ·²¬»®ª¿´- º±® ½±²¬·²«±«- ø´±²¹·¬«¼·²¿´÷ ½±ª»®·²¹ò
ÌÞóìÚ òòòòò ìó°±·²¬ó®¿¬»¼ íðß à îëð Ê¿½ô îê ó ïð ßÉÙ Ý¿¬¿´±¹ ý Ì»³°ò Ó¿¨ò Ó·²ò ×²-¬¿´´ Ü·³»²-·±²-
Þóìô Þóïðô Þóîïòòò-¬¿·²´»-- -¬»»´ ¿¬¬¿½¸³»²¬ ¾¿²¼- ÚÌóïÔ îððpÚ ìðpÚ ïñîþ ¨ ïðèù
ÚÌóïØ ëððpÚ óìðpÚ ïñîþ ¨ ïðèù
º±® -»½«®·²¹ Ì¸»®³±² ½±²²»½¬·±² µ·¬- ¬± °·°»-ò Û¿½¸ ßÔóîðÔ ïëðpÚ ìðpÚ îþ ¨ ïëðù
µ·¬ ·²½´«¼»- ¬©± Þóì ¾¿²¼-ò ßÔóîðØ íððpÚ îðpÚ îþ ¨ ïèðù
Þóìòòòº±® °·°»- «° ¬± ìþ øïðð ³³÷ ¼·¿³»¬»® ßÔóíðÔ ïëðpÚ ìðpÚ íþ ¨ ïëðù
Þóïðòòòº±® °·°»- «° ¬± ïðþ øîëð ³³÷ ¼·¿³»¬»® ßÔóíðØ íððpÚ îðpÚ íþ ¨ ïèðù
Þóîïòòòº±® °·°»- «° ¬± îïþ øëíð ³³÷ ¼·¿³»¬»®
Ú±®³ ÌÛÐððïðóðèðé w Ì¸»®³±² Ó¿²«º¿½¬«®·²¹ Ý±ò Ð®·²¬»¼ ·² ËòÍòßò

INTERFACE JUNCTION
BOXES
Special Note: Mounting brackets for the Interface

Junction boxes are custom made. Refer to
document D1-0003for mounting bracket details
Klippon® POK - Polyester enclosures
Polyester enclosures
Enclosures
The POK series is based on a high-quality glass fibre-reinforced

A
polyester enclosure which represents an economical solution for
electrical connections.
The enclosures are ideal wherever corrosion resistance, impact
resistance and a high IP protection class are required.
Features:
• 17 sizes
• Cover with stainless steel screws
• Mounting holes located outside of the sealed area
• Threaded holes for mounting rails and mounting plates
• Approved to the latest international standards
Our assembly service can supply these enclosures preassembled

with terminals and cable glands according to customer
requirements.
Technical data Standard ATEX
Material Glass fibre-reinforced polyester Glass fibre-reinforced polyester

to DIN 16913 to DIN 16913 with added graphite
Surface Grey, similar to RAL 7001 Black, similar to RAL 9011
Gasket Chloroprene + polyurethane Silicone (VMQ)
Cover screws Stainless steel Stainless steel
Protection class IP 66 IP 66
Impact resistance 7J 7J
Temperature range –40 °C to +90 °C T silicone –55 °C to +100 °C
Flammability UL94 V0 UL94 V0
Toxicity Halogen- and cadmium-free Halogen- and cadmium-free
Approvals
KEMA 03ATEX2078 U
T II 2 G EEx e II
KEMA 03ATEX2077
T II 2 G EEx e II T6
T II 2 (1) G EEx e [ia] IIC T6
T II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6
Overview of enclosures
Type H x W x D 75 x 80 x 55 75 x 110 x 55 75 x 160 x 55 75 x 190 x 55 75 x 230 x 55 120 x 122 x 90

Standard, RAL 7001 1277200000 1277300000 1277400000 1565400000 9510510000 1277500000
For hazardous areas (Ex), RAL 9011 9510210000 9510220000 9510320000 9510330000 9510340000 9510230000
Standard, RAL 7001 1277600000 1565410000 1277700000 1277800000 9510520000 1565420000
Type H x W x D 250 x 400 x 120 250 x 600 x 120 405 x 400 x 120 250 x 255 x 160 250 x 400 x 160
Standard, RAL 7001 1565430000 9510470000 1565440000 9510530000 9510540000
For hazardous areas (Ex), RAL 9011 9510290000 9510300000 9510310000 9510360000 9510370000
Note: Please specify ambient temperature of application when ordering and also note gasket material (e.g. –55 °C / silicone gasket)
A.62
Universal polyester enclosure POK 5
Enclosures
91
25
220 66
12 0
1 11
204
Height x Width x Depth mm 120 x 220 x 91

Weight g 1060
Ordering data Technical data

RAL 7001 Order No. Terminal content vertical horizontal
standard 1277600000 2.5 mm 1x31
4 mm 1x26
RAL 9011 6 mm 1x19
Enclosure for hazardous areas (Ex) 9510240000 10 mm 1x15
16 mm 1x13
Note Please state the ambient temperature of the enclosure when
ordering (e.g. -55°C/silicone seal). Note
Terminal rails should be fitted directly.
Accessories The assembly with modular terminals includes a 10 mm space at each end of the terminal rail.
Recommendation:
Terminal rail, set Order No.
TS 35 DIN Rail (screw clamp terminal) WDU 2.5 1020000000 / (tension clamp terminal) ZDU 2.5 1608510000
35 mm wide 1928120000
Mounting plate
sheet steel, galvanised 9510600000 Max. number of cable entries per enclosure side **
A/B C/D
M 12 24 8
M 16 14 4
Spacer, M6 x 8, set of 2 M 20 12 3
15 mm long 3896100000 M 25 5 1
20 mm long 3896200000 M 32 4 1
30 mm long 3896300000 M 40 3
M 50
Hinges, diecast aluminium, set M 63
1580360000
Enclosure sides - ID
Earth continuity plate (ECP), cruciform

9511050000 A A = Top
B = Bottom
C = Left
D = Right
E E = Base
Mounting feet, set of 4 C D
9510910000
Note Sets also include any fixings necessary. 2 hinges per long side Note ** Our IP68 plastic cable glands fitted without a bruss plate (cruciform) serve as a reference for these recommended values.
A.69
Enclosures

A
Features:
• 17 sizes

requirements.

Approvals
KEMA 03ATEX2078 U
T II 2 G EEx e II
KEMA 03ATEX2077

Standard, RAL 7001 1277200000 1277300000 1277400000 1565400000 9510510000 1277500000
Standard, RAL 7001 1277600000 1565410000 1277700000 1277800000 9510520000 1565420000
Standard, RAL 7001 1565430000 9510470000 1565440000 9510530000 9510540000
A.62
Enclosures
A

Weight g 1710

standard 1277700000 2.5 mm 1x36
4 mm 1x30
RAL 9011 6 mm 1x23
16 mm 1x16
Recommendation:
35 mm wide 1928140000
Mounting plate
A/B C/D
M 12 30 11
M 16 24 6
15 mm long 3896100000 M 25 5 2
20 mm long 3896200000 M 32 4 2
30 mm long 3896300000 M 40 3 1
M 50
1580360000

9511070000 A A = Top
B = Bottom
C = Left
D = Right
E E = Base
9510910000
A.71
Enclosures

A
Features:
• 17 sizes

requirements.

Approvals
KEMA 03ATEX2078 U
T II 2 G EEx e II
KEMA 03ATEX2077

Standard, RAL 7001 1277200000 1277300000 1277400000 1565400000 9510510000 1277500000
Standard, RAL 7001 1277600000 1565410000 1277700000 1277800000 9510520000 1565420000
Standard, RAL 7001 1565430000 9510470000 1565440000 9510530000 9510540000
A.62

Enclosures

Weight g 2150

standard 1277800000 2.5 mm 1x56
4 mm 1x47
RAL 9011 6 mm 1x36
16 mm 1x24
Recommendation:
35 mm wide 1928150000
Mounting plate
A/B C/D
M 12 45 11
M 16 36 6
15 mm long 3896100000 M 25 8 2
20 mm long 3896200000 M 32 6 2
30 mm long 3896300000 M 40 5 1
M 50
1580360000

9511080000 A A = Top
B = Bottom
C = Left
D = Right
E E = Base
9510910000
A.72
Modular PE terminals
Terminals, W-Series
WPE 4 4 mm² WPE 4/ZZ 4 mm²

Identical profiles from 2.5 to 10 mm² with uniform Twin connection
end and partition plates. An unsurpassed
combination of many advantages!
Their small size compared to the respective rated
cross-section makes the modular terminals with
the compact design very popular.
In hazardous area applications, the installation instructions

and the rated data specifications for accessories given in the
technical appendix must be followed.
Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 6.1 x 56 x 47 6.1 x 70 x 53.5

max. cond. cross-section mm² 6 6
Max. clamping range mm² 0.13...6 PE 0.13...6 PE
Technical data IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T

Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
Rated cross-section mm² 4 AWG 22...10 AWG 26...10 4 4 AWG 30...10 4
Rated voltage to adjacent terminal V 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage to adjacent terminal kV 8 8
Short-time withstand current 480 A (4 mm²) 480 A (4 mm²)
E Pollution severity 3 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A4 / V-0 A4 / V-0
Approvals ?ru#i~xa r{
Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection Further connection Rated connection Further connection
solid / stranded mm² 0.5...6 / 0.5...6 0.5...6 / 0.5...4
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...6 / 0.5...4 0.5...4 / 0.5...4
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) 0.5...1.0 Nm (M 3) 0.5...0.8 Nm (M 3)
Tightening torque range (fixing screw) 0.5...0.8 Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm/- 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Note
Ordering data
Version Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
green/yellow Wemid WPE 4 100 1010100000 WPE 4/ZZ 50 1905130000
Note
Accessories
End plate / partition Type Width Qty Order No. Type Width Qty Order No.
Dark beige Wemid WAP WDU/WTR4/ZZ 1.5 mm 50 1905150000
End bracket
Dark beige Wemid WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000 WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000
Dark beige Wemid
Screwdriver
Standard SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000 SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000
Marking systems (see assortment in catalogue 7)

Marking tags DEK 5/6 / WS 12/6 DEK 5/6 / WS 12/6
For detailed information on other accessories and ap- Rail support for insulated installation of terminal rail „SH 2“ order no. Rail support for insulated installation of terminal rail „SH 2“ order no.
plications, refer to the „Accessories“ section 0494920000 (10 pcs) 0494920000 (10 pcs)
E.22
Modular PE terminals
Terminals, W-Series
WPE 6 6 mm² WPE 10 10 mm²

Identical profiles from 2.5 to 10 mm² with uniform

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 7.9 x 56 x 47 9.9 x 60 x 47

max. cond. cross-section mm² 10 16
Max. clamping range mm² 0.08...10 PE 1.31...16 PE
Technical data IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Rated cross-section mm² 6 AWG 22...8 AWG 20...8 6 10 AWG 16...6 AWG 16...6 10
Rated voltage to adjacent terminal V 800 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage to adjacent terminal kV 8 8
Short-time withstand current 720 A (6 mm²) 1200 A (10 mm²)
E Pollution severity 3 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A5 / V-0 B6 / V-0
Approvals ?ru#i~xa ?ru#i~xa
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...10 / 0.5...6 1.5...16 / 1.5...16
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) 0.8...1.6 Nm (M 3.5) 1.2...2.4 Nm (M 4)
Tightening torque range (fixing screw) 0.5...1.0 Nm 0.5...1.0 Nm
Note Conductor connection H07V-..10 and AWG 8 tighten with 1.4-1.6 Nm. AWG 6/7 and H07V-R16 tighten with 2.4 Nm.
Ordering data
green/yellow Wemid WPE 6 50 1010200000 WPE 10 50 1010300000
Note
Accessories
End bracket Type Width Qty Order No. Type Width Qty Order No.
Screwdriver
Standard SD 0.8x4.0x100 1 9008340000 SD 1.0x5.5x150 1 9008350000
PEN bridge
WQB-PEN 10 10 1060300000

Marking tags DEK 5/8 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/6,5
For detailed information on other accessories and ap- Rail support for insulated installation of terminal rail „SH 2“ order no. Rail support for insulated installation of terminal rail „SH 2“ order no.
plications, refer to the „Accessories“ section 0494920000 (10 pcs) 0494920000 (10 pcs)
E.24
Feed-through terminals
Terminals, W-Series
WDU 2.5N/600 UL 2.5 mm² WDU 4 4 mm²

Identical profiles from 2.5 to 10 mm² with uniform 600V UL/CSA
end and partition plates. An unsurpassed Compact design

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 5.1 x 44 x 43.5 6.1 x 60 x 47

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm² 32 / 4 41 / 6
Max. clamping range mm² 0.05...4 0.13...6
Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Rated data IEC UL CSA IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
Rated voltage V 800 600 600 800 600 600 690
Rated current A 24 25 20 32 35 35 28
Rated cross-section mm² 2.5 AWG 30...12 AWG 26...12 4 AWG 22...10 AWG 26...10 4
Rated impulse voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 8/3 8/3
E Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A3 / V-0 A4 / V-0
Approvals r#a ?ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...4 / 0.5...2.5 0.5...6 / 0.5...4
2 conductors with same cross-section (H05V/H07V)
solid / stranded mm² 0.5...1.5 0.5...2.5
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5 0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5
Note 2.5 mm² conductor with wire end ferrule plus plastic collar only with collar Note max. current of terminal (41 A) when using WQV!
optimised for diameter (order No. 1333100000, 500 pcs)
Ordering data
Dark beige Wemid WDU 2.5N/600UL 100 1730940000 WDU 4 100 1020100000
Blue Wemid WDU 4 BL 100 1020180000
Note Rated voltage 400V when using cross-connection ZQV
See section „W-series accessories“ for colours available.
Accessories
Pluggable cross-connection Type Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No.
2-pole ZQV 4N/2 GE 32 A 60 1758250000
3-pole ZQV 4N/3 GE 32 A 60 1762630000
4-pole ZQV 4N/4 GE 32 A 60 1762620000
10-pole ZQV 4N/10 GE 32 A 20 1758260000
20-/24-pole ZQV 4N/20 GE 32 A 20 1909020000
Screwable cross-connection current
2-pole WQV 2.5/2 32 A 50 1053660000 WQV 4/2 32 A 50 1051960000
3-pole WQV 2.5/3 32 A 50 1053760000 WQV 4/3 32 A 50 1054560000
4-pole WQV 2.5/4 32 A 50 1053860000 WQV 4/4 32 A 50 1054660000
10-pole WQV 2.5/10 32 A 20 1054460000 WQV 4/10 41 A 20 1052060000
End plate / partition Width Width
Dark beige Wemid WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000
Blue Wemid WAP 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 50 1050080000
Dark beige Wemid WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000
Blue Wemid WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000
End bracket
Dark beige Wemid WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000
Dark beige Wemid EW 35 8.5 mm 50 0383560000
Testing / Checking
Standard WTA 1 WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632290000 WTA 3 WDU4 6 mm 25 1632350000
With assembly peg WTA 1/ZA WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632300000 WTA 3/ZA WDU4 6 mm 25 1632360000
Cover
With lightning flash symbol WAD 4 GE BED 4 mm 50 1072000000 WAD 5 M. BL. 5 mm 50 1053460000
blank WAD 4 WS 4 mm 50 1072100000 WAD 5 NEUTRAL 5 mm 50 1056060000

Marking tags DEK 5/5 / WS 12/5 WS 12/6
For detailed information on other accessories and ap- Socket and test plug, see section „W-series accessories“ Socket and test plug, see section „W Series accessories“. Shielding rail
plications, refer to the „Accessories“ section LS 2.8 1056400000.
E.6
Terminals, W-Series
WDU 6 6 mm² WDU 10 10 mm²

Identical profiles from 2.5 to 10 mm² with uniform

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 7.9 x 60 x 47 9.9 x 60 x 47

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm² 57 / 10 76 / 16
Max. clamping range mm² 0.08...10 1.31...16
Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Rated voltage V 800 600 600 550 1000 600 600 550
Rated current A 41 50 50 36 57 65 65 50
Rated cross-section mm² 6 AWG 22...8 AWG 22...8 6 10 AWG 18...6 AWG 16...6 10
Rated impulse voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 8/3 8/3
E Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A5 / V-0 B6 / V-0
Approvals ?ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U ?ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...10 / 0.5...6 1...6 / 1.5...16
2 conductors with same cross-section (H05V/H07V)
solid / stranded mm² 0.5...2.5 1...6
flexible / Stranded wire with end ferrules mm² 0.5...2.5 / 0.5...2.5 1...6 / 1...6
Note Note max. current of terminal (57 A) when using WQV! Conductor connec- Note max. current of terminal (76 A) when using WQV! AWG 6/7 and
tion H07V-..10 and AWG 8 tighten with 1.4-1.6 Nm. H07V-R16 tightened with 2.4 Nm.
Ordering data
Dark beige Wemid WDU 6 100 1020200000 WDU 10 50 1020300000
Blue Wemid WDU 6 BL 100 1020280000 WDU 10 BL 50 1020380000
Note For colours available see section W-series accessories „Specific functions“ For colours available see section W-series accessories „Specific functions“
Accessories
Screwable cross-connection Type current Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No.
2-pole WQV 6/2 57 A 50 1052360000 WQV 10/2 57 A 50 1052560000
3-pole WQV 6/3 57 A 50 1054760000 WQV 10/3 57 A 50 1054960000
4-pole WQV 6/4 57 A 50 1054860000 WQV 10/4 57 A 50 1055060000
10-pole WQV 6/10 57 A 20 1052260000 WQV 10/10 57 A 20 1052460000
End plate / partition Width Width
Dark beige Wemid WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000 WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000
Blue Wemid WAP 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 50 1050080000 WAP 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 50 1050080000
Dark beige Wemid WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000
Blue Wemid WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000
End bracket
Testing / Checking
Standard WTA 5/1 5 mm 25 1051260000 WTA 5/1 5 mm 25 1051260000
Cover
With lightning flash symbol WAD 8 M. BL. 8 mm 50 1053560000 WAD 8 M. BL. 8 mm 50 1053560000
blank WAD 8 NEUTRAL 8 mm 50 1056160000 WAD 8 NEUTRAL 8 mm 50 1056160000

Marking tags DEK 5/8 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/6,5
For detailed information on other accessories and ap- Socket and test plug, see section „W Series accessories“, shielding rail Socket and test plug, see section „W Series accessories“, shielding rail
plications, refer to the „Accessories“ section LS 2.8 1056400000. LS 2.8 1056400000.
E.8
Terminals, W-Series
WDU 10/ZR 10 mm² WDU 16 16 mm² WDU 16N 16 mm²
Supplementary connection, right (4 mm²) With peg for higher connection stability Suitable for power distribution
Compact design
9.9 x 70 x 49.5 11.9 x 60 x 63 12 x 60 x 47

4mm2
76 / 16 10mm2 101 / 25 101 / 25
1.31...16 10mm2 1.5...25 1.5...25
IEC 60947-7-1 IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1

IEC UL CSA IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA
800 600 600 1000 600 600 690 690 300 300
57 65 65 76 85 85 66 76 70 70
10 AWG 16...6 AWG 16...6 16 AWG 18...4 AWG 14...6 16 16 AWG 14...6 AWG 14...6
8/3 8/3 8/3
B6 / A4 / V-0 B7 / V-0 B7 / V-0 E
r#a ?ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U r#ia
Rated connection Further connection Rated connection Further connection Rated connection Further connection
1.5...16 / 1.5...16 0.5...6 / 1.5...4 1.5...16 / 1.5...25 1.5...16 / 1.5...25
1...6 / 1.5...16 0.5...4 / 0.5...4 1.5...25 / 1.5...16 1.5...16 / 1.5...16
1.2...2.4 Nm (M 4) 3.0...4.0 Nm (M 5) 1.2...2.4 Nm (M 4)
12 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 9 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 16 / 1.0 x 5.5 mm 12 / 1.0 x 5.5 mm
1...1.5 1.5...6 1.5...4

1...6 / 1...6 1.5...6 / 1.5...6 1.5...4 / 1.5...4
Note max. current of terminal (76 A) when using WQV. AWG 6/7 and Conductor connection H07V-..16 and AWG 6 with tightening torque of AWG 6/7 and H07V-R25 with 1.5 Nm tightening torque
H07V-R16 tighten with 2.4 Nm. ZR connection top right A 4. 2.0-2.4 Nm.
Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
WDU 10/ZR 50 1042400000 WDU 16/ZA 50 1028900000 WDU 16N 50 1036100000
WDU 10/ZR BL 50 1042480000 WDU 16/ZA BL 50 1028980000 WDU 16N BL 50 1036180000
Rated data relates to 10mm² connection Order No. 1020400000 and 1020480000 (blue) versions without
pegs (50 pcs.)
Type current Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No.
WQV 10/2 57 A 50 1052560000 WQV 16/2 76 A 50 1053260000 WQV 16N/2 101 A 50 1636560000
WQV 10/3 57 A 50 1054960000 WQV 16/3 76 A 50 1055160000 WQV 16N/3 76 A 50 1636570000
WQV 10/4 57 A 50 1055060000 WQV 16/4 76 A 50 1055260000 WQV 16N/4 76 A 50 1636580000
WQV 10/10 57 A 20 1052460000 WQV 16/10 76 A 10 1053360000
Width Width Width
WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000 WTW EN 3 mm 20 1058800000
WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000
WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000 WEW 35/1 12 mm 50 1059000000 WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000
WTA 5/1 5 mm 25 1051260000 WTA 2 WDU2.5-10 5 mm 25 1632320000
WAD 12 M. BL. 12 mm 50 1055960000 WAD 12N GE BED 12 mm 50 1073200000

WAD 12 NEUTRAL 12 mm 50 1056260000 WAD 12N WS 12 mm 50 1073290000
DEK 5/5 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/6,5

Socket and test plug, see section „W-series accessories“ Socket and test plug, see section „W-series accessories“ Socket and test plug, see section „W-series accessories“
E.9
Accessories - Electrical distribution
Terminals, W-Series
WQV 2.5 WQV 4 WQV 6
Technical data
current A 32 / 32 / 41 / 57
Type of fixing Screwed Screwed Screwed
Pitch mm 5.10 6.10 8.00
Ordering data Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
2-pole WQV 2.5/2 50 1053660000 WQV 4/2 50 1051960000 WQV 6/2 50 1052360000
3-pole WQV 2.5/3 50 1053760000 WQV 4/3 50 1054560000 WQV 6/3 50 1054760000
4-pole WQV 2.5/4 50 1053860000 WQV 4/4 50 1054660000 WQV 6/4 50 1054860000
5-pole WQV 2.5/5 10 1053960000 WQV 4/5 10 1057860000 WQV 6/5 50 1062660000
6-pole WQV 2.5/6 10 1054060000 WQV 4/6 10 1057160000 WQV 6/6 50 1062670000
7-pole WQV 2.5/7 10 1054160000 WQV 4/7 10 1057260000 WQV 6/7 50 1062680000
8-pole WQV 2.5/8 10 1054260000 WQV 4/8 10 1057960000
9-pole WQV 2.5/9 10 1054360000 WQV 4/9 10 1058060000
E 10-pole WQV 2.5/10 20 1054460000 WQV 4/10 20 1052060000 WQV 6/10 20 1052260000
15-pole WQV 2.5/15 10 1059660000 WQV 4/15 10 1057460000
20-pole WQV 2.5/20 10 1577570000
32-pole WQV 2.5/32 10 1577600000
For terminal: For terminal: For terminal:
WDU 1.5 ZZ WDK 2.5 WDU 4 WDU 6
WDU 1.5 BLZ WDK 2.5 V WDU 4 SL WDU 6 SL
WDU 2.5/1.5 ZR WDK 2.5 DU-PE
WDU 2.5 WDK 2.5 F
WDU 2.5 F
WQV 35N WQV 50N WQV 70N
Technical data
current A / 101 / 150 / 192
Pitch mm 16.00 18.50 20.50
2-pole WQV 35N/2 20 1079200000 WQV 50N/2 5 1834060000 WQV 70N/2 5 9512240000
5-pole
6-pole
7-pole
8-pole
9-pole
10-pole
15-pole
20-pole
32-pole
WDU 35N WDU 50N WDU 70N
E.128
Terminals, W-Series
WQV 2.5 WQV 4 WQV 6
Technical data
current A 32 / 32 / 41 / 57
Pitch mm 5.10 6.10 8.00
2-pole WQV 2.5/2 50 1053660000 WQV 4/2 50 1051960000 WQV 6/2 50 1052360000
3-pole WQV 2.5/3 50 1053760000 WQV 4/3 50 1054560000 WQV 6/3 50 1054760000
4-pole WQV 2.5/4 50 1053860000 WQV 4/4 50 1054660000 WQV 6/4 50 1054860000
5-pole WQV 2.5/5 10 1053960000 WQV 4/5 10 1057860000 WQV 6/5 50 1062660000
6-pole WQV 2.5/6 10 1054060000 WQV 4/6 10 1057160000 WQV 6/6 50 1062670000
7-pole WQV 2.5/7 10 1054160000 WQV 4/7 10 1057260000 WQV 6/7 50 1062680000
8-pole WQV 2.5/8 10 1054260000 WQV 4/8 10 1057960000
9-pole WQV 2.5/9 10 1054360000 WQV 4/9 10 1058060000
E 10-pole WQV 2.5/10 20 1054460000 WQV 4/10 20 1052060000 WQV 6/10 20 1052260000
15-pole WQV 2.5/15 10 1059660000 WQV 4/15 10 1057460000
20-pole WQV 2.5/20 10 1577570000
32-pole WQV 2.5/32 10 1577600000
WDU 2.5 WDK 2.5 F
WDU 2.5 F
Technical data
current A / 101 / 150 / 192
Pitch mm 16.00 18.50 20.50
5-pole
6-pole
7-pole
8-pole
9-pole
10-pole
15-pole
20-pole
32-pole
E.128
Terminals, W-Series
WQV 10 WQV 16 WQV 16N WQV 35
/ 57 / 76 / 76 / 112
Screwed Screwed Screwed Screwed
10.00 12.00 12.00 16.00
Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
WQV 10/2 50 1052560000 WQV 16/2 50 1053260000 WQV 16N/2 50 1636560000 WQV 35/2 50 1053060000
WQV 10/3 50 1054960000 WQV 16/3 50 1055160000 WQV 16N/3 50 1636570000 WQV 35/3 50 1055360000
WQV 10/4 50 1055060000 WQV 16/4 50 1055260000 WQV 16N/4 50 1636580000 WQV 35/4 50 1055460000
WQV 16-4/6 10 1064000000 WQV 35-4/6 10 1064200000
WQV 10/10 20 1052460000 WQV 16/10 10 1053360000 WQV 35/10 10 1053160000 E
For terminal: For terminal: For terminal: For terminal:

WDU 10 WDU 16 WDU 16N WDU 35
WDU 10 SL
WDU 10 ZR
WQV 70/95 WQV 95N/120N WQV 120
232 / 192 269 / 269 269 / 269

Screwed Screwed Screwed
27.00 27.00 32.00
WQV 70/95/2 5 1063500000 WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826890000 WQV 120/2 5 1063300000
WQV 70/95/3 5 1063600000 WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826900000 WQV 120/3 5 1063400000
WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826910000

WDU 70/95 WDU 95N/120N WDU 120/150
E.129
Terminals, W-Series
WQV 2.5 WQV 4 WQV 6
Technical data
current A 32 / 32 / 41 / 57
Pitch mm 5.10 6.10 8.00
2-pole WQV 2.5/2 50 1053660000 WQV 4/2 50 1051960000 WQV 6/2 50 1052360000
3-pole WQV 2.5/3 50 1053760000 WQV 4/3 50 1054560000 WQV 6/3 50 1054760000
4-pole WQV 2.5/4 50 1053860000 WQV 4/4 50 1054660000 WQV 6/4 50 1054860000
5-pole WQV 2.5/5 10 1053960000 WQV 4/5 10 1057860000 WQV 6/5 50 1062660000
6-pole WQV 2.5/6 10 1054060000 WQV 4/6 10 1057160000 WQV 6/6 50 1062670000
7-pole WQV 2.5/7 10 1054160000 WQV 4/7 10 1057260000 WQV 6/7 50 1062680000
8-pole WQV 2.5/8 10 1054260000 WQV 4/8 10 1057960000
9-pole WQV 2.5/9 10 1054360000 WQV 4/9 10 1058060000
E 10-pole WQV 2.5/10 20 1054460000 WQV 4/10 20 1052060000 WQV 6/10 20 1052260000
15-pole WQV 2.5/15 10 1059660000 WQV 4/15 10 1057460000
20-pole WQV 2.5/20 10 1577570000
32-pole WQV 2.5/32 10 1577600000
WDU 2.5 WDK 2.5 F
WDU 2.5 F
Technical data
current A / 101 / 150 / 192
Pitch mm 16.00 18.50 20.50
5-pole
6-pole
7-pole
8-pole
9-pole
10-pole
15-pole
20-pole
32-pole
E.128
Terminals, W-Series
WQV 10 WQV 16 WQV 16N WQV 35
/ 57 / 76 / 76 / 112
Screwed Screwed Screwed Screwed
10.00 12.00 12.00 16.00
Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
WQV 10/2 50 1052560000 WQV 16/2 50 1053260000 WQV 16N/2 50 1636560000 WQV 35/2 50 1053060000
WQV 10/3 50 1054960000 WQV 16/3 50 1055160000 WQV 16N/3 50 1636570000 WQV 35/3 50 1055360000
WQV 10/4 50 1055060000 WQV 16/4 50 1055260000 WQV 16N/4 50 1636580000 WQV 35/4 50 1055460000
WQV 16-4/6 10 1064000000 WQV 35-4/6 10 1064200000
WQV 10/10 20 1052460000 WQV 16/10 10 1053360000 WQV 35/10 10 1053160000 E
For terminal: For terminal: For terminal: For terminal:

WDU 10 WDU 16 WDU 16N WDU 35
WDU 10 SL
WDU 10 ZR
WQV 70/95 WQV 95N/120N WQV 120
232 / 192 269 / 269 269 / 269

Screwed Screwed Screwed
27.00 27.00 32.00
WQV 70/95/2 5 1063500000 WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826890000 WQV 120/2 5 1063300000
WQV 70/95/3 5 1063600000 WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826900000 WQV 120/3 5 1063400000
WQV 95N/120N- 5 1826910000

WDU 70/95 WDU 95N/120N WDU 120/150
E.129
Overview W-Series
Terminals, W-Series
W-Series / Clamping yoke screw connection technology
For a long time now, Weidmüller's W-Series terminal with screw

clamp connection technology, has set the standard.
With many advantages, the W-Series remains market leader
and unsurpassed.
The W-Series offers solutions for conductor cross-sections

from 0.06 to 300 mm2 and for all common electrical functions.
Another advantage is the choice of plug-in (ZQV) or screw-in
(WQV) cross-connections within one modular terminal. It brings
considerable time savings compared to all other screw terminals
on the market.
E
Thanks to the patented design of Weidmüller's W-Series screw
connection technology it is possible for two conductors of the
same cross-section to be connected in one and the same
clamping point without difficulty.
Versions
W-standard W-compact
så Same contour design from 2.5 to 10 mm2 så 3MALLERåSIZE
så #ONDUCTORåSIZESåFROMååTOååMM2 så )DENTIFIEDåBYåANåh.våINåTHEåTYPEåDESIGNATIONå
så ,ARGEåCLAMPINGåRANGEå så #ONDUCTORåSIZESåFROMååTOååMM2
Product overview
Rated cross-section 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact
åCONNECTIONSå s s
ååANDååCONNECTIONSå så så så så så så å å så å å
PE terminals
2åCONNECTIONSå s s
3ååANDååCONNECTIONSå så å så så så så å å så å å
<ki[j[hc_dWbi
Disconnect test terminal blocks s
3 and 4åCONNECTIONSå å å så å s
3-conductor installation terminals s
N-conductor disconnect terminals s
Fbk]#_dj[hc_dWbi
Initiator/Actuator terminals s
Terminals with electronic components s
Miniature terminals for TS 15 s
Rated cross-section 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 240 mm2
Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact Standard Compact
<[[Z#j^hek]^j[hc_dWbi
PE terminals
D#YedZkYjehZ_iYedd[Yjj[hc_dWbi
E.2
Overview W-Series
Terminals, W-Series
1 The connection 2 Cross-connections, also pluggable 3 Easy to use
Separation of electrical and mechanical så åScrew-in or plug-in cross-connections så å#ANåBEåCLIPPEDåTOåORåREMOVEDåFROMå

function thus providing galvanic isolation. as required the terminal rail in either direction
så (
å ARDENEDåSTEELåSCREWåCLAMPå så &ORåSCREWåTERMINALSåTHEåPLUGGABLEåå så &EATURESåCAPTIVEåSCREW
technology. cross-connection (ZQV) is unique, with så 2ECESSEDåCLAMPINGåSCREWåPOSITIONå
så "
å USBARåOFåCOPPERåFORåLOWåTHROUGHå considerable time savings provides guide for screwdriver
resistance. så #ROSS CONNECTIONSåWITHåUPåTOååPOLESå så !LLåPARTSåFITTEDåCAPTIVEåWITHINåTHEå
Tin-plated surface for minimum contact available as standard for 2.5 and 4 terminal
resistances. så POLEåCROSS CONNECTIONSå:16 å så .UMEROUSåLABELLINGåOPTIONSå
available for custom fabrication
E
Wemid insulating material Common profiles

3
3
så .ON TRACKINGå#4)å så )DENTICALåSIZEåFROMååTOååMM2
2
så 4HERMALLYåSTABLEåUPåTOååª# så å-INIMUMåNUMBERåOFåDIFFERENTåACCESSO-
1
så 6åFLAMMABILITYåCLASSåTOå5,å ries = lower costs and better logistics
så (ALOGENåCADMIUMåANDåPHOSPHORåFREE så %ASYåPLANNINGå
4
5
3 Standards and directives
The reliable contact and dependability of

THEå7EIDMßLLERåSYSTEMSåAREåVERIFIEDåBY
så Type tests to IEC 60947-7-1/-2/-3
så .ATIONALåANDåINTERNATIONALåAPPROVALSå
så !åLARGEåPORTFOLIOåOFå5,åANDå#3!å
4 Reliable contact 5 Safe to use approvals
så å7 3ERIESåCERTIFIEDåFORåRAILWAYåAPPLICA-
så W-Series offers galvanic isolation by så 3å HOCKåPROTECTIONåWITHåCONNECTEDåCON tions (see chapter on stud terminals)
providing a steel screw clamp tech- ductors, even when cross-connected. så å!4%8åAPPROVALåSEEåCERTIFICATEåONå
nology for mechanical function, with så å4ERMINALSåSUPPLIEDåWITHåOPENåCLAMPING Weidmüller website)
copper busbar for low through point. In addition, the misplugging så å!LLåMATERIALSåCHECKEDåFORåCONFORMITYå
resistance and electrical function. safeguard prevents conductors from with the latest environmental directives
så å.OåMAINTENANCEåNOåNEEDåTOåRETIGHTENå being inserted incorrectly ANDå2O(3åREQUIREMENTS
the clamping screw så %MBOSSINGåONåCLAMPINGåYOKEåANDå så )%#%XåAPPROVED
så 6IBRATION PROOFåCONNECTIONåMANYå current bar engage so that even the
T
W-terminals certified for railway use to smallest conductors are reliably
å %.åå
så (IGHESTåCONTACTåFORCEåOFåALLåCONNECTIONå
clamped; large conductors and also
2 conductors are gripped in the middle *
systems
E.3
Terminals, W-Series
WDU 2.5 2.5 mm² WDU 2.5N 2.5 mm² WDU 2.5N/ZQV 2.5 mm²
With screwable cross-connection With pluggable cross-connection
Compact design Compact design
5.1 x 60 x 47 5.1 x 44 x 37.5 5.1 x 44 x 37.5

32 / 4 32 / 4 32 / 4
0.05...4 0.05...4 0.05...4
IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1

IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA
800 600 600 550 500 300 300 440 500 300 300
24 25 20 21 24 10 20 21 24 20 20
2.5 AWG 30...12 AWG 26...12 2.5 2.5 AWG 30...12 AWG 26...12 2.5 2.5 AWG 30...12 AWG 26...12
8/3 6/3 6/3
A3 / V-0 A3 / V-0 A3 / V-0 E
?ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U ru#i~xa KEMA 98ATEX1683 U ru#i
Rated connection Further connection Rated connection Further connection Rated connection Further connection
0.5...4 / 1.5...4 0.5...4 / 1.5...4 0.5...4 / 1.5...4
0.5...4 / 0.5...2.5 0.5...4 / 0.5...2.5 0.5...4 / 0.5...2.5
0.4...0.8 Nm (M 2.5) 0.4...0.6 Nm (M 2.5) 0.4...0.6 Nm (M 2.5)
10 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm
0.5...1.5 0.5...1.5 0.5...1.5

0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5 0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5 0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5
2.5 mm² conductor with wire end ferrule plus plastic collar only with collar 2.5 mm² conductor with wire end ferrule plus plastic collar only with collar 2.5 mm² conductor with wire end ferrule plus plastic collar only with collar
optimised for diameter (order No. 1333100000, 500 pcs) optimised for diameter (order No. 1333100000, 500 pcs) optimised for diameter (order No. 1333100000, 500 pcs)
WDU 2.5 100 1020000000 WDU 2.5N 100 1023700000 WDU 2.5N ZQV 100 1040800000
WDU 2.5 BL 100 1020080000 WDU 2.5N BL 100 1023780000 WDU 2.5N ZQV BL 100 1040880000
Rated voltage 400V when using cross-connection ZQV. See section „W- For colours available see section W-series accessories „Specific functions“ Rated voltage 400 V when using the cross-connection ZQV.
series accessories“ for colours available.
Type current Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No.
ZQV 2.5N/2 GE 24 A 60 1693800000 ZQV 2.5N/2 GE 24 A 60 1693800000
ZQV 2.5N/3 GE 24 A 60 1693810000 ZQV 2.5N/3 GE 24 A 60 1693810000
ZQV 2.5N/4 GE 24 A 60 1693820000 ZQV 2.5N/4 GE 24 A 60 1693820000
ZQV 2.5N/10 GE 24 A 20 1693880000 ZQV 2.5N/10 GE 24 A 20 1693880000
ZQV 2.5N/20 GE 24 A 20 1909000000 ZQV 2.5N/20 GE 24 A 20 1909000000
current
WQV 2.5/2 32 A 50 1053660000 WQV 2.5/2 32 A 50 1053660000
WQV 2.5/3 32 A 50 1053760000 WQV 2.5/3 32 A 50 1053760000
WQV 2.5/4 32 A 50 1053860000 WQV 2.5/4 32 A 50 1053860000
WQV 2.5/10 32 A 20 1054460000 WQV 2.5/10 32 A 20 1054460000
Width Width Width
WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000 WAP WDU2.5N/4N 1.5 mm 50 1060000000 WAP WDU2.5N/4N 1.5 mm 50 1060000000
WAP 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 50 1050080000 WAP WDU2.5N/4N BL 1.5 mm 50 1060080000 WAP WDU2.5N/4N BL 1.5 mm 50 1060080000
WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000
WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 BL 1.5 mm 20 1050180000
WEW 35/2 8 mm 100 1061200000

EW 35 8.5 mm 50 0383560000 EW 35 8.5 mm 50 0383560000
WTA 2 WDU2.5-10 5 mm 25 1632320000 WTA 1 WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632290000 WTA 1 WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632290000

WTA 2/ZA WDU2.5-10 5 mm 25 1632330000 WTA 1/ZA WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632300000 WTA 1/ZA WDU1.5 5 mm 25 1632300000
WAD 5 M. BL. 5 mm 50 1053460000 WAD 4 GE BED 4 mm 50 1072000000 WAD 4 GE BED 4 mm 50 1072000000

WAD 5 NEUTRAL 5 mm 50 1056060000 WAD 4 WS 4 mm 50 1072100000 WAD 4 WS 4 mm 50 1072100000
DEK 5/5 / WS 12/5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/5 DEK 5/5 / WS 12/5

Socket and test plug, see section „W Series accessories“. Ensure 2.5 Socket and test plug, see section „W-series accessories“
mm² max. when using the WQB. Shielding rail LS 2.8 1056400000.
E.5
Fuse terminals
Terminals, W-Series
KDKS 1/35 DB 4 mm² WSI 6 6 mm² WSI 6 LD 6 mm²
Metric fuses 5 x 20 mm Metric fuses Metric fuses / bipolar LED
8 x 73.5 x 55.6 7.9 x 60 x 62 7.9 x 60 x 72

6.3 / 4 6.3 / 10 6.3 / 10
0.22...4 0.5...10 0.5...10
IEC 60947-7-3 IEC 60947-7-3 IEC 60947-7-3

IEC UL CSA IEC UL CSA IEC UL CSA
500 300 500 600 300 500 300 300
6.3 10 6.3 10 10 6.3 6.3 6.3
4 AWG 22...12 6 AWG 20...8 AWG 20...8 6 AWG 20...8 AWG 20...8
6/3 6/3 6/3
A3 / V-0 A5 / V-0 A5 / V-0 E
r#a ?ru#i~xa ?ru#~xa
Rated connection Rated connection Rated connection
0.5...4 / 1.5...4 0.5...10 / 1.5...10 0.5...10 / 1.5...10
0.5...4 / 0.5...4 0.5...10 / 0.5...6 0.5...10 / 0.5...6
0.5...0.8 Nm (M 3) 0.8...1.6 Nm (M 3.5) 0.8...1.6 Nm (M 3.5)
8 / 0.6 x 3.5 mm 12 / 4.0 x 0.8 mm 12 / 4.0 x 0.8 mm
0.5...1.5 0.5...2.5 0.5...2.5

0.5...1.5 / 0.5...1.5 0.5...2.5 / 0.5...2.5 0.5...2.5 / 0.5...2.5
Note: max. conductor size = 2.5 mm² when using the cross-connection. Cartridge fuses or contact sleeves have to be inserted centrally. Version Cartridge fuses or contact sleeves have to be inserted centrally. A defec-
with contact sleeve, order No. 1028200000 (50 pcs/11 A). tive fuse causes a residual current to flow via the LED!
KDKS 1/35 DB 50 9532440000 WSI 6 50 1011000000
WSI 6/LD 10-36V DC/AC 50 1011300000
WSI 6/LD 30-70V DC/AC 50 1012200000
WSI 6/LD 60-150V DC/AC 50 1012300000
WSI 6/LD 250AC 50 1012400000
Max. power loss (1.6 W) at the cartridge fuse limits the rated current. Max. power loss (1.6 W) at the cartridge fuse limits the rated current. Max. power loss (1.6 W) at the cartridge fuse limits the rated current.
Type Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No. Type current Qty Order No.
QL 2 SAK6N 57 A 50 0194300000 QL 2 SAK6N 32 A 50 0194300000
QL 3 SAK6N 57 A 50 0194400000 QL 3 SAK6N 57 A 50 0194400000
QL 4 SAK6N 57 A 50 0194500000 QL 4 SAK6N 57 A 50 0194500000
QL 10 SAK6N 57 A 20 0338300000 QL 10 SAK6N 32 A 20 0338300000
Width Width Width
AP KDKS1 1.5 DB 1.5 mm 20 9532470000 WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000 WAP 2.5-10 1.5 mm 50 1050000000
WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000 WAP 16+35 WTW 2.5-10 1.5 mm 20 1050100000
SD 0.8x4.0x100 1 9008340000 SD 0.8x4.0x100 1 9008340000
G 20/0.25A/F 10 0430500000 G 20/0.25A/F 10 0430500000 G 20/0.25A/F 10 0430500000

G 20/0.50A/F 10 0430600000 G 20/0.50A/F 10 0430600000 G 20/0.50A/F 10 0430600000
G 20/1.00A/F 10 0430700000 G 20/1.00A/F 10 0430700000 G 20/1.00A/F 10 0430700000
G 20/2.00A/F 10 0430900000 G 20/2.00A/F 10 0430900000 G 20/2.00A/F 10 0430900000
G 25/0.50A/M WS 10 0510300000 G 25/0.50A/M WS 10 0510300000

G 25/1.00A/M RT 10 0265800000 G 25/1.00A/M RT 10 0265800000
G 25/2.00A/F BL 10 0192700000 G 25/2.00A/F BL 10 0192700000
G 25/4.00A/F BR 10 0192800000 G 25/4.00A/F BR 10 0192800000
DEK 5/8 DEK 5/8 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 5/8 / WS 12/6,5

Screw M3 x 5 order No. 1052100000 for QL 2 - QL 10. Screw M3 x 5 order No. 1052100000 for QL 2 - QL 10.
E.39
CABLE GLANDS
CMP CABLE GLAND AND CABLE CONNECTION SPECIALISTS
PX2K Flameproof Ex d, Increased Safety Ex e, Restricted

PX2K CABLE GLAND
CMP HAZARDOUS AREA PRODUCTS
Breathing Ex nR Compound Barrier Cable Gland

CMP Type PX2K Triple Certified Flameproof (Type ‘d’), Increased Safety (Type ‘e’) and Restricted Breathing (Type ‘nR’)
cable gland for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22 Hazardous Areas with all types of armoured cable
providing a compound barrier seal around the cable conductors and an environmental seal on the cable outer sheath.
The cable gland provides mechanical cable retention and electrical continuity via armour termination. A combined
detachable armour cone and compound tube, together with AnyWay universal clamping ring arrangement allows the
cable to be easily disconnected from the equipment, for maintenance and change out etc., and re-connected with the
same consummate ease. This feature also facilitates remote make off procedures when the termination is to be
conducted in confined spaces or in areas of restricted access.
The CMP PX2K cable gland is suitable for use with all forms of equipment protection permitted in Zone 1, Zone 2,
Zone 21 & Zone 22 provided always that the prevailing code of practice for selection and installation is observed, e.g.
IEC 60079-14.
The PX2K is supplied in kit form inclusive of two detachable armour cones. Stepped Cone is suitable for SWA cables,
Grooved Cone is suitable for all other approved armoured cables.
C
TECHNICAL DATA
Type PX2K A
Design Specification BS 6121:Part 1:1989, EN 50262:1999

ATEX Cetification SIRA06ATEX1097X
ATEX II 2 GD Ex d IIC, Ex e II, Ex nR II, Ex tD A21 IP66 - Equipment
Code of Protection Category
Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21, & Zone 22 - Gas Groups IIA, IIB, IIC
EN 60079-0:2004, EN 60079-1:2004, EN 60079-7:2003, EN 60079-15:2003,
Compliance Standards
EN 61241-0:2004, EN 61241-1:2004 E
IECEx Approval Number IECEx SIR 06.0044X
Code of Protection Category Ex d IIC, Ex e II, Ex nR II, Ex tD A21 IP66
IEC 60079-0:2004, IEC 60079-1:2003, IEC 60079-7:2001,
Compliance Standards
IEC 60079-15:2005, IEC 61241-0:2004, IEC 61241-1:2004
LL
GOST R Certificate Number POCC GB. 05.B01912
U
Code of Protection Category Ex d IIC U, Ex e II U

L L L
Compliance Standards OCT P 52350.0-2005, OCT P 52350.1-2005, OCT P 52350.7-2005
F
GGTN Permit Number PPC 00-18262
GOST K Certificate Number KZ7500052.05.01.00063
RoK Permit for Use Number 08-067693
Lloyds Approval Number 01/00172
DNV Approval Number E-6157
ABS Approval Number 01-LD 234401-PDA
Continuous Operating Temperature -60°C to +100°C
Ingress Protection Rating IP66, IP67, IP68
Ingress Protection Document 5046 C549G
Deluge Protection Compliance DTS01 : 91
Deluge Protection Document 5046 C549G-D
B
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickelplated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Seal Material CMP SOLO LSF Thermoplastic Elastomer / Epoxy Resin Barrier Compound D
Wire Braid Armour, Single Wire Armour (SWA), Screened Flexible Wire Braid
Cable Type
(e.g. CY / SY), Steel Tape Armour (STA) Pliable Wire Armour (PWA)
Armour Clamping Detachable Compound Tube / Cone & AnyWay Universal Clamping Ring
LL
Sealing Technique Unique CMP "LRS" ™ Outer Seal (Load Retention Seal) 05
U
Sealing Area(s) Inner Compound Barrier & Cable Outer Sheath

Note: Dedicated version for Steel Wire Armour type is PX2KW.
Locknut, Shroud, Entry Thread Seal, Serrated Washer, Earth Tag, Dedicated version for all other Armour types is PX2KX
Optional Accessories
Adaptor/Reducer
Note: This standard design concept is also available with
bi-code approvals, suitable for installation in systems
complying with NEC wiring code rules.
Cable Gland Selection Table
Available Entry Threads ‘C’ Diameter Number Overall Armour Range †
Cable Over Cable Across Across Nominal Ordering Cable
Minimum of PVC
Gland Standard Option Thread Conductors Diameter Grooved Stepped Flats Corners Protrusion Reference Shroud
Gland
‘A’ Cores ‘B’ Cone Cone ‘D’ ‘D’ Length (Brass Metric) Weight
Size Length ‘E’ Reference*
‘F’ # (Kgs)
Metric NPT NPT Max Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Max Max
20S/16 M20 1/2” 3/4” 15.0 12.6 15 6.1 11.5 0.0 1.0 0.9 1.25 24.0 26.6 58.5 20S16PX2K1RA PVC04 0.200
20S M20 1/2” 3/4” 15.0 12.6 15 9.5 15.9 0.0 1.0 0.9 1.25 24.0 26.6 58.5 20SPX2K1RA PVC04 0.200
20 M20 1/2” 3/4” 15.0 12.6 15 12.5 20.9 0.0 1.0 0.9 1.25 30.5 33.3 60.5 20PX2K1RA PVC06 0.230
25S M25 3/4” 1” 15.0 17.5 29 14.0 22.0 0.0 1.0 1.25 1.6 37.5 40.5 67.5 25SPX2K1RA PVC09 0.330
25 M25 3/4” 1” 15.0 17.5 29 18.2 26.2 0.0 1.0 1.25 1.6 37.5 40.5 67.5 25PX2K1RA PVC09 0.330
32 M32 1” 1-1/4” 15.0 23.6 51 23.7 33.9 0.0 1.0 1.6 2.0 46.0 51.0 69.5 32PX2K1RA PVC11 0.510
40 M40 1-1/4” 1-1/2” 15.0 30.0 80 27.9 40.4 0.0 1.0 1.6 2.0 55.0 61.0 78.0 40PX2K1RA PVC15 0.720
50S M50 1-1/2” 2” 15.0 36.6 122 35.2 46.7 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 60.0 66.5 75.5 50SPX2K1RA PVC18 0.825
50 M50 2” 2-1/2” 15.0 41.0 149 40.4 53.1 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 70.0 78.6 80.5 50PX2K1RA PVC21 0.860
63S M63 2” 2-1/2” 15.0 47.9 205 45.6 59.4 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 75.0 83.2 91.5 63SPX2K1RA PVC23 1.450
63 M63 2-1/2” 3” 15.0 53.7 259 54.6 65.9 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 80.0 89.0 92.0 63PX2K1RA PVC25 1.600
75S M75 2-1/2” 3” 15.0 59.8 320 59.0 72.1 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 89.0 101.6 99.0 75SPX2K1RA PVC28 2.300
75 M75 3” 3-1/2” 15.0 64.3 364 66.7 78.5 0.0 1.0 2.0 2.5 99.0 111.1 102.0 75PX2K1RA PVC30 3.050
90 M90 3” 3-1/2” 15.0 75.3 500 76.2 90.4 0.0 1.6 3.15 3.15 114.0 128.6 120.0 90PX2K1RA PVC32 5.000
All dimensions in millimetres
Note: *LSF Shrouds also available on request. †Alternative armour clamping range available for non-standard armour sizes. Marine approvals including Lloyds, DNV & ABS are also available from CMP Products.
# Other thread forms are available
131 www.cmp-products.com
ELECTRICAL HEAT
TRACING DISTRIBUTION
PANEL
Automation Products
Pilot devices, 22 mm
The whole range
News in this catalog
! Customer specific marking online

! Extended range of emergency stops
! Extended range of machine stops both in
Modular range and Compact range
! Three position selector switches with operation
of center position
! New potentiometers
! Lampblock with integrated LED
! Micro contact block
Signal Towers/Optical modules:
! Light element with blinking light for 24 V (AC)DC,
115V AC and 230 V AC, now with integrated LED
Pilot devices, 22 mm
Compact range
The compact range is a most competitive choice for customers

with high requirements of cost efficiency, easy to use and reliable
products.
General construction Operators

L ”All-in-one function” L Pushbuttons, non-illuminated
L One order code =one complete function L Emergency stop pushbuttons, non-
LEasy mounting illuminated, twist, pull or key release
L Less stock keeping L Machine stop pushbuttons, non-illuminated,
L Broad range of accessories twist, pull or key release
L Same front design as for the modular L Selector switches, non-illuminated,
range. 2 or 3 position
L Robust actuators in clear colors with
large text and push area Pilot lights
L Ba 9s base for filament bulbs or LED
Technical advantages L Pilot light with integrated LED
L High degree of protection: IP 66, 67, 69K
L One or two built-in electrically separated
contacts (1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC or 1NC &
1NO)
L Contacts with wiping action
L Low built-in depth
43
1SFC151003C0201
Pilot lights/Pilot lights with
integrated LED
Minimum order quantity: 10 pieces
Pilot light BA 9s base, bulb not included

Description Packing qty: 10 pcs Weight,
Type Order Code kg
L Red CL-100R 1SFA 619 402 R1001 0.018
L Green CL-100G 1SFA 619 402 R1002 0.018
L Yellow CL-100Y 1SFA 619 402 R1003 0.018
L Blue CL-100L 1SFA 619 402 R1004 0.018
L White CL-100W 1SFA 619 402 R1005 0.018
L Clear CL-100C 1SFA 619 402 R1008 0.018
Pilot light with integrated LED Service life >50 000 hours.
Designed to prevent glowing from leakage current
Color Rated Wave- Lumi- Packing qty: 10 pcs Weight,
current length nance Type Order Code kg
mA nm mcd
Rated voltage 12 V, DC 1)
L Red 30 625 60 CL-501R 1SFA 619 402 R5011 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-501G 1SFA 619 402 R5012 0.023
L Yellow 30 590 60 CL-501Y 1SFA 619 402 R5013 0.023
L Blue 30 470 22 CL-501L 1SFA 619 402 R5014 0.023
L White 30 2)
88 CL-501W 1SFA 619 402 R5015 0.023
Rated voltage 24 V, AC/DC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-502R 1SFA 619 402 R5021 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-502G 1SFA 619 402 R5022 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-502Y 1SFA 619 402 R5023 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-502L 1SFA 619 402 R5024 0.023
L White 15 2)
88 CL-502W 1SFA 619 402 R5025 0.023
L Red 15 625 60 CL-504R 1SFA 619 402 R5041 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-504G 1SFA 619 402 R5042 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-504Y 1SFA 619 402 R5043 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-504L 1SFA 619 402 R5044 0.023
L White 15 2)
88 CL-504W 1SFA 619 402 R5045 0.023
L Red 15 625 60 CL-505R 1SFA 619 402 R5051 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-505G 1SFA 619 402 R5052 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-505Y 1SFA 619 402 R5053 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-505L 1SFA 619 402 R5054 0.023
L White 15 2)
88 CL-505W 1SFA 619 402 R5055 0.023
Rated voltage 110-130 V, AC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-513R 1SFA 619 402 R5131 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-513G 1SFA 619 402 R5132 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-513Y 1SFA 619 402 R5133 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-513L 1SFA 619 402 R5134 0.023
2)
L White 15 88 CL-513W 1SFA 619 402 R5135 0.023
1)
Rated voltage 110-130 V, DC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-515R 1SFA 619 402 R5151 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-515G 1SFA 619 402 R5152 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-515Y 1SFA 619 402 R5153 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-515L 1SFA 619 402 R5154 0.023
2)
L White 15 88 CL-515W 1SFA 619 402 R5155 0.023
1)
Rated voltage 220 V, DC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-520R 1SFA 619 402 R5201 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-520G 1SFA 619 402 R5202 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-520Y 1SFA 619 402 R5203 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-520L 1SFA 619 402 R5204 0.023
2)
L White 15 88 CL-520W 1SFA 619 402 R5205 0.023
Rated voltage 230 V, AC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-523R 1SFA 619 402 R5231 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-523G 1SFA 619 402 R5232 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-523Y 1SFA 619 402 R5233 0.023
L Blue 15 470 22 CL-523L 1SFA 619 402 R5234 0.023
L White 15 2)
88 CL-523W 1SFA 619 402 R5235 0.023
Rated voltage 380 V, AC
L Red 15 625 60 CL-530R 1SFA 619 402 R5301 0.023
L Green 15 520 126 CL-530G 1SFA 619 402 R5302 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-530Y 1SFA 619 402 R5303 0.023
Marking L Blue 15 470 22 CL-530L 1SFA 619 402 R5304 0.023
See the section Legend L White 15 2)
88 CL-530W 1SFA 619 402 R5305 0.023
plates. Rated voltage 415 V, AC
There is also possibility to or- L Red 15 625 60 CL-541R 1SFA 619 402 R5411 0.023
der customer specific marked L Green 15 520 126 CL-541G 1SFA 619 402 R5412 0.023
L Yellow 15 590 60 CL-541Y 1SFA 619 402 R5413 0.023
operators online. L Blue 15 470 22 CL-541L 1SFA 619 402 R5414 0.023
L White 15 2)
88 CL-541W 1SFA 619 402 R5415 0.023
1)
Care should be taken for DC supply where + and - must be correctly connected.
(this is marked on the product, X1 (+) and X2 (-)).
2)
X=0.31, Y=0.32
L Accessories ......................................page 48 L Technical data ............................................................ page 52 L Dimensions ................................................ page 83
47
1SFC151003C0201
Technical data
Approvals Material
The pushbuttons, selector switches and pilot lights are approved by:
No ozone depleting substances in the products.
- National approval agencies: UL, China Compulsory Product
Certification, GOST and GOST Ukraine. All front parts are made of polycarbonate
- Marine classifications: Det Norske Veritas, Germanischer Lloyd,
Material Characteristics
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping and Russian River Register.
For detailed information please contact ABB
PC Polycarbonate High impact strength, good outdoor resis-
tance.
Standards Chemical resistance - See table below

IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: PSU Polysulphone Can withstand high temperatures, acids,
EN 60947-1 General rules basic solutions, alkaline compounds,
IEC 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5-1: oils, alcohols.
EN 60947-5-1 Control circuit devices and switching elements - PA Polyamide Can withstand high temperatures, ali-
Electromechanical control circuit devices phatic, aromatic and chlorinated hydro-
IEC 60947-5-5 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5-5: carbons, esters, ketone-aldehydes,
EN 60947-5-5 Control circuit devices and switching elements - alcohols and basic solutions.
Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical PBT Can withstand high temperature, aliphatic
latching function and aromatic hydrocarbons, acids, basic
IEC 60073 Basic and safety principles for man-machine solutions, alcohols, grease and oils
EN 60073 interface, marking and identification - Coding Zinc Good corrosion resistance in inland-,
principles for indicators and actuators sea and industrial atmosphere.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures Light-alloy Good corrosion resistance in inland-,
EN 60529 (IP Code) sea and industrial atmosphere.
EN 50013 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for
industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive Chemical resistance for polycarbonate
number for particular control switches
Chemical class Effects
DIN 40050-9 Road vehicles; degrees of protection (IP-code);
protection against foreign objects; water and Acids No significant effect under most typical
contact; electrical equipment conditions of concentration and temper-
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment ture
Alcohols & Alkalis Generally compatible at low concentra-
CSA C22.2 No 14 Industrial Control Equipment
tion and room temperature. Higher
concentrations and elevated tempera-
Degrees of protection tures can result in etching and attack
Pilot device: IEC/EN UL/CSA
DIN evidenced by decomposition.
Compact pushbutton, Aliphatic Hydrocarbons Generally compatible
CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 IP66, IP67 Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Amines Surface crystallization and chemical at-
and IP69K tack. Avoid.
Compact selector switch,
Aromatic Hydrocarbons Partial solvents and severe stress crack-
C2SS, C3SS IP66, IP67 Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
ing agents (i.e., xylene, toulene). Avoid.
and IP69K
Compact pilot light, CL IP66, IP67 Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Detergents and Cleaners Mild soap solutions are generally compa-
and IP69K tible. Strong alkaline materials should be
avoided.
Compact emergency stop
pushbutton, Esters Cause severe crystallization. Partial sol-
CE3T,CE3P, CE4T, vents. Avoid.
CE4P, CE3K1, CE4K1 IP66 Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Greases and Oils Pure petroleum types generally compa-
IP69K tible. Many additives used with them are
IP67 not.
Terminals IP20 Halogenerated Hydrocar-
bons Solvents. Aoid.
Ketones Cause severe crystallization and stress
cracking. Partial solvents. Avoid.
Silicone Oil and Greases Generally compatible up to 85 oC.
52
1SFC151003C0201
Technical data
Mechanical life
Operators
Pushbuttons with flush or extended
button, selector switch 500 000 operations
Emergency stop pushbutton 50 000 operations
Temperature
Ambient temperature during operation -25 to +70 °C
Storage temperature -40 to +85 °C
Tightening torque
Locking nut, M22 Min. 2 Nm
Max. 2.3 Nm
Contacts
Ratings as per UL, CSA, NEMA C300 R300
Rated insulation voltage 250 V 250 V
Rated thermal current 2.5 A 1A
Rated operational current
at 120 V 1.5 A
125 V 0.22 A
240 V 0.75 A
250 V 0.11 A
Ratings as per IEC 60947-5-1
Rated insulation voltage, Ui 300 V
Rated thermal current, Ith 5A
Rated operational current, Ie
utilisation category AC-15
at 120 V 1.5 A
240 V 1A
Rated operational current, Ie,
utilzation category DC-13,
at 24 V 0.3 A
125 V 0.2 A
Short circuit protection
Max. fuse at 1 kA 16 A ordinary
10 A delayed
Tightening torque
Compact pushbutton & selector switch 0.8 Nm (M3)
Compact pilot light 0.9 Nm (M3.5)
Compact emergency stop pushbutton 0.8 Nm (M3)
Terminals
Plus-minus Pozidriv No. 2
Compact pushbutton
Compact selector switch
Compact emergency stop
Connectable area min. 1 x 0.5 mm2/1 x AWG22
max. 2 x 1.5 mm2/2 x AWG14
Compact pilot light
Connectable area min. 1 x 0.5 mm2/1 x AWG20
max. 2 x 2.5 mm2/2 x AWG14
Make-and-break contacts
Modular pushbutton
Compact pushbutton Compact emergency stop pushbutton
NC -1 -2 NC -1 -2
NO -3 -4 NO -3 -4
= Closed contact = Closed contact
53
1SFC151003C0201
Contact us
Technical catalogue - Edition 2011
System pro M compact®

DIN Rail components
for low voltage installation
Presentation
1
The technologically innovative bidirectional cylinder-lift
A wide product range suitable terminal available in the System pro M compact® devices
for all applications enables synchronous closing of the front and rear wiring input.
Highest safety standard for the installer thanks to protection

For all applications in residential, industrial and commercial against electric shock according to EN 41140.
installations ABB System pro M compact® range offers many
functionalities like: Marking of devices is reliable and clear.
− protection and switching Both supply and connection with busbars from top or bottom
− checking and monitoring is admitted.
− control and programming
Moreover, shape and dimensions of the devices allow a

perfect integration in existing installations.
4 Introduction | System pro M compact ®

Advantages
1
The System pro M compact® range offers enormous advantages
in relation to installation.
Advanced and smart solutions allow a far easier and safer
installation and guarantee time saving.
MCBs are also available with an RCD-blocks DDA 200 2P, 3P, 4P up to Safety connections between DDA 200
integrated auxiliary contact 40 A fit into two modules. Versions in 63 and S 200 thanks to a safe plastic key
(1 NO or 1 NC). Existing installations A sizes are supplied with two additional system.
can be easily upgraded to include terminals for remote tripping.
auxiliary switch functionality.
Availability of a wide range of RCBOs. Universal signal/auxiliary and auxiliary Supply from top or bottom either with
contacts fit on S 200, cables or busbars.
F 200 and DS 200.
6 Introduction | System pro M compact ®

1
The bi-directional cylinder-lift terminal allows easier and quicker connections. In
addition it avoids errors because it prevents the use of free cable seats.
This high protection level against errors eliminates right from the start industrial
accidents deriving from incorrect wiring.
The terminal guarantees a very high tightening torque for cables with a section up
to 25 mm2.
The housing of connection busbars in the rear seat guarantees easier wiring.
Safe terminal technology: the terminals Error proof terminals: they avoid the use Supply from top or bottom also possible
offer protection from misconnection. of free cable seats. with busbars.
Without busbars two terminal spaces Special quick fastening for an easy More working space between
can be used for cables with different removal of the devices from the component rows.
cross sections: incoming supply with assembly pressing upwards, both for
supplementary terminal up to 50 mm2 MCBs S 200 and RCCBs F 200: the
from the front side. only in the market that can be removed
without a screwdriver.
System pro M compact ® | Introduction 7

2CSC400230F0201
MCBs protect installations
against overload and short-
circuit, warranting reliability
and safety for operations.
New System pro M compact
S 200 series satisfies most
2 common requirements in
terms of MCBs, allowing the
usage of them for domestic,
industrial and commercial
applications.
Three series – S 200, S 200
M and S 200 P – with three
different breaking capacities
up to 25 kA are available, in
all characteristics (B, C, D, K
and Z) and configurations (1P,
1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N and 4P),
in all the sizes up to 63 A.
2CSC400261F0201
2CSC400260F0201
All these MCBs comply to
IEC/EN 60898 and IEC/EN
60947-2 Standards. The
range includes also the new
S 200 U and S 200 UP in
accordance to UL 489/CSA-
C22.2 N 05 Standard.
It is also available the new
integrated auxiliary contact
on the bottom side which per-
mits to save 50% space.
Thought to be advanced,
MCBs range also offers all
the “plus” advantages which
characterized the whole
new System pro M compact
range.
2CSC400259F0201
S 200 series devices obtained
a lot of marks and approvals,
so they can be used in all
world’s markets.
2/4 ABB SACE

System Technical features S 200
pro M compact® MCBs S 200 series
Electrical Data Standards IEC/EN

UL/CSA
Poles
Tripping characteristics
Rated current In A
Rated voltage Un IEC/EN 60898-1 V
Rated voltage Ue IEC/EN 60947-2 V
Rated voltage UL/CSA V
Insulation voltage Ui IEC/EN 60898-1 / 60947-2 V

Max. operating voltage UBmax. V
Min. operating voltage UBmin. V

Rated frequency f Hz
Rated short-circuit capacity Icn IEC/EN 60898-1 kA
Ultimate short-circuit capacity Icu IEC/EN 60947-2 kA
Service short-circuit capacity Ics IEC/EN 60947-2 kA
Rated interrupting capacity UL 1077, CSA 22.2 No. 235 kA

Short-circuit current rating SCCR UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5 kA
Energy limiting class IEC/EN 60898-1
Overvoltage category IEC/EN 60898-1 / 60947-2
Pollution degree IEC/EN 60898-1
IEC/EN 60947-2
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp. (1.2/50 µs) IEC/EN 60898-1 / 60947-2 kV
Dielectric test voltage IEC/EN 60898-1 kV
Mechanical Data Housing
Toggle
Contact position indication
Protection degree EN 60529
Electrical endurance ops.
Mechanical endurance ops.

Shock resistance IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Tropicalization (damp heat cyclic) IEC/EN 60068-2-30 °C/RH
Ambient temperature °C
Storage temperature °C
Reference temperature for tripping characteristics IEC/EN 60898-1 °C
IEC/EN 60947-2
Installation Terminal
Cross-section of conductors (top / bottom) IEC/EN 60898-1 / 60947-2 mm2
UL/CSA AWG
Cross-section of busbars (top / bottom) IEC/EN 60898-1 / 60947-2 mm2
UL/CSA AWG
Torque IEC/EN Nm
UL/CSA in-Ibs.
Screwdriver
Mounting
Mounting position
Supply
Dimensions and weight Mounting dimensions DIN 43880
Pole dimensions (H x D x W) mm
Pole weight g
Combination with aux. elements Auxiliary contact
Signal contact/auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release
2/6 ABB
System Technical features S 200
pro M compact® MCBs S 200 series
2
S 200 S 200 M S 200 P S 200 U S 200 UP S 200 UDC
IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 60947-2 –
UL 1077, CSA 22.2 No. 235 – UL 1077, CSA 22.2 No. 235 UL 489, CSA 22.2 No.5 UL 489
1P, 2P, 3P, 4P, 1P+N, 3P+N 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P
B, C, D, K, Z K, Z
0.5…63 A 0.2…63 A 0.2…63 A 0.2…25 A 1...63 A
1P: 230/400 V AC; 1P+N: 230 V AC ; 2...4P: 400 V AC; 3P+N: 400 V AC –
1P: 230 V AC; 1P+N: 230 V AC; 2...4P: 400 V AC; 3P+N: 400 V AC 1P: 230 V AC; 2...4P: 400 V AC –
– 1P: 240 V AC 1P: 277 V AC 1P: 60 V DC
480Y / 277 V AC 480Y / 277 V AC
2...4P: 240 V AC 2...4P: 480Y / 277 V AC 2P: 125 V DC
250 V AC (phase to ground), 500 V AC (phase to phase) –
1P: 253 V AC; 1P+N: 253 V AC; 2P: 440 V AC; 3...4P: 440 V AC; 3P+N: 440 V AC 1P: 253/440 V AC; 2...4P: 440 V AC –
1P: 72 V DC; 2P: 125 V DC
12 V AC - 12 V DC 12 V AC 12 V DC
50 / 60 Hz DC
≤ 25 A: 25 kA –
6 kA 10 kA
> 25 A: 15 kA
≤ 40 A: 15 kA ≤ 25 A: 25 kA –
10 kA 10 kA
50, 63 A: 10 kA ≥ 32 A: 15 kA
≤ 25 A: 12.5 kA –
≤ 40 A: 11.2 kA
7.5 kA ≤ 32…40 A: 11.2 kA 7.5 kA
50, 63 A: 7.5 kA
50, 63 A: 7.5 kA
6 kA – 10 kA –
– 10 kA 14 kA (UL)
3 –
III –
2 –
3 –
4 kV (test voltage 6.2 kV at sea level, 5 kV at 2,000 m) –
2 kV (50 / 60Hz, 1 min.) –
Insulation group I, RAL 7035
Insulation group II, black, sealable
Marking on toggle, I ON / 0 OFF Marking on toggle (I ON / 0 OFF), Real CPI (red ON / green OFF)
IP20 / IPXXB, IP40 in enclosure with cover
In < 32 A: 20,000 ops AC, In ≥ 32 A: 10,000 ops. AC
6,000 ops.
1,000 ops. DC
20,000 ops.
30 g - 3 shocks - 11 ms
5g - 20 cycles at 5…150…5 Hz with load 0.8In
28 cycles with 55°C/90-96% and 25°C/95-100%
-25 … +55°C
-40 … +70°C
B, C, D: 30°C
25°C (UL/CSA) 25°C (UL)
K, Z: 20°C
Failsafe bi-directional cylinder-lift terminal
25 mm2 / 25 mm2 –
18 - 4 AWG – 18 - 4 AWG
10 mm2 / 10 mm2 –
18 - 8 AWG – 18 - 8 AWG
2.8 Nm
25 in-Ibs. – 25 in-Ibs.
No. 2 Pozidrive
On DIN rail 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 by fast clip
any
optional Please note polarity of device
Mounting dimension 1 –
88 x 69 x 17.5 mm 92 x 71 x 17.5 mm 100 x 71 x 17.5 mm 92 x 71 x 17.5 mm
ca. 125 g ca. 140 g
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes no
ABB 2/7
System Selection tables S 200 M-C
pro M compact® MCBs S 200 series M
10000
C S 200 M-C characteristic

Function: protection and control of the circuits against overloads and short-circuits; protection for
resistive and inductive loads with low inrush current.
Applications: residential, commercial and industrial.
Standard: IEC/EN 60898, IEC/EN 60947-2
2 Icn=10 kA
Number Rated Order Bbn Price Price Weight Pack

of poles current details 4016779 1 piece group 1 piece unit
In A Type code Order code EAN kg pc.

2CSC400424F0201
1 0.5 S 201 M-C 0.5 2CDS 271 001 R0984 54990 5 0.125 10
1 S 201 M-C 1 2CDS 271 001 R0014 54992 9 0.125 10
1.6 S 201 M-C 1.6 2CDS 271 001 R0974 54991 2 0.125 10
2 S 201 M-C 2 2CDS 271 001 R0024 54993 6 0.125 10
3 S 201 M-C 3 2CDS 271 001 R0034 54994 3 0.125 10
4 S 201 M-C 4 2CDS 271 001 R0044 54995 0 0.125 10
6 S 201 M-C 6 2CDS 271 001 R0064 54996 7 0.125 10
8 S 201 M-C 8 2CDS 271 001 R0084 54997 4 0.125 10
10 S 201 M-C 10 2CDS 271 001 R0104 54998 1 0.125 10
13 S 201 M-C 13 2CDS 271 001 R0134 54999 8 0.125 10
16 S 201 M-C 16 2CDS 271 001 R0164 55000 0 0.125 10
20 S 201 M-C 20 2CDS 271 001 R0204 55001 7 0.125 10
25 S 201 M-C 25 2CDS 271 001 R0254 55002 4 0.125 10
32 S 201 M-C 32 2CDS 271 001 R0324 55003 1 0.125 10
UBmax 40 S 201 M-C 40 2CDS 271 001 R0404 55004 8 0.125 10
253 V
72 V ... 50 S 201 M-C 50 2CDS 271 001 R0504 54393 4 0.125 10
63 S 201 M-C 63 2CDS 271 001 R0634 54394 1 0.125 10
2CSC400425F0201
2 0.5 S 202 M-C 0.5 2CDS 272 001 R0984 55020 8 0.250 5
1 S 202 M-C 1 2CDS 272 001 R0014 55022 2 0.250 5
1.6 S 202 M-C 1.6 2CDS 272 001 R0974 55021 5 0.250 5
2 S 202 M-C 2 2CDS 272 001 R0024 55023 9 0.250 5
3 S 202 M-C 3 2CDS 272 001 R0034 55024 6 0.250 5
4 S 202 M-C 4 2CDS 272 001 R0044 55025 3 0.250 5
6 S 202 M-C 6 2CDS 272 001 R0064 55026 0 0.250 5
8 S 202 M-C 8 2CDS 272 001 R0084 55027 7 0.250 5
10 S 202 M-C 10 2CDS 272 001 R0104 55028 4 0.250 5
13 S 202 M-C 13 2CDS 272 001 R0134 55029 1 0.250 5
16 S 202 M-C 16 2CDS 272 001 R0164 55030 7 0.250 5
20 S 202 M-C 20 2CDS 272 001 R0204 55031 4 0.250 5
25 S 202 M-C 25 2CDS 272 001 R0254 55032 1 0.250 5
UBmax 32 S 202 M-C 32 2CDS 272 001 R0324 55033 8 0.250 5
440 V 40 S 202 M-C 40 2CDS 272 001 R0404 55034 5 0.250 5
125 V ...
50 S 202 M-C 50 2CDS 272 001 R0504 54397 2 0.250 5
63 S 202 M-C 63 2CDS 272 001 R0634 54398 9 0.250 5
2CSC400426F0201
3 0.5 S 203 M-C 0.5 2CDS 273 001 R0984 55035 2 0.375 1
1 S 203 M-C 1 2CDS 273 001 R0014 55037 6 0.375 1
1.6 S 203 M-C 1.6 2CDS 273 001 R0974 55036 9 0.375 1
2 S 203 M-C 2 2CDS 273 001 R0024 55038 3 0.375 1
3 S 203 M-C 3 2CDS 273 001 R0034 55039 0 0.375 1
4 S 203 M-C 4 2CDS 273 001 R0044 55040 6 0.375 1
6 S 203 M-C 6 2CDS 273 001 R0064 55041 3 0.375 1
8 S 203 M-C 8 2CDS 273 001 R0084 55042 0 0.375 1
10 S 203 M-C 10 2CDS 273 001 R0104 55043 7 0.375 1
13 S 203 M-C 13 2CDS 273 001 R0134 55044 4 0.375 1
16 S 203 M-C 16 2CDS 273 001 R0164 55045 1 0.375 1
20 S 203 M-C 20 2CDS 273 001 R0204 55046 8 0.375 1
25 S 203 M-C 25 2CDS 273 001 R0254 55047 5 0.375 1
32 S 203 M-C 32 2CDS 273 001 R0324 55048 2 0.375 1
40 S 203 M-C 40 2CDS 273 001 R0404 55049 9 0.375 1
UBmax
50 S 203 M-C 50 2CDS 273 001 R0504 54399 6 0.375 1
440 V
63 S 203 M-C 63 2CDS 273 001 R0634 54400 9 0.375 1
Technical details ............................ pag. 11/2 Overall dimensions ........................ pag. 13/2
2/20 ABB
2CSC400162F0201 2CSC400266F0201
2CSC400170F0201 2CSC400244F0201 2CSC400256F0201

RCDs assure a protection
to people and installations
against fault current to earth.
They are divided into three
families:
- RCCBs, which are sensitive
only to earth fault current
(therefore they have to be
connected in series with a
MCB or a fuse to protect
them against overcurrents
and short-circuits)
- RCD-blocks, which are
devices to be assembled on
a MCB with lower or equal
rated current to provide
protection against both
3 earth-fault currents and
overload or short-circuits
- RCBOs, which combines
in a single device protection
against both earth-fault
currents and overloads or
short-circuits.
New RCDs System pro M
compact® range presents
a wide offer for all the three
families, respectively F 200,
DDA 200 and DS 200 series.
A large offer for standard
instantaneous and selective
AC and A types is completed
with some configurations for
special applications, like AP-R
type against perturbations or
AE type for emergency stop.
All sizes up to 63 A with all the
sensitivity thresholds up to 1 A
are offered in all the possible
pole configurations.
The new F200 PV B is
specifically designed for
differential protect against
earth-fault currents in
photovoltaic installation.
ABB expands the offering
of its System pro M
compact® with new residual
current circuitbreakers with
overcurrent protection, and earth fault current in a the differential tripping and compact® devices.
DS201 (1 phase + neutral) single device. which cannot be activated in Residual current relays
and DS202C (2 phases) both case of manual operation on together with toroidal
DS201 and DS202C are
available in two modules. the toggle. transformers can detect
equipped with clear indication
leakage current.
The new residual current flags. With the practical label
circuitbreakers with carrier fitted in the new They are available in modular
The internal contact position
overcurrent protection are circuitbreakers you can give version (RD2 range and the
allows an exact information
a technologically advanced maximum visibility to the new RD3 electronic residual
of the circuit-breaker status:
and comprehensive range, information relating to the current relay range) and in
“green”, open contacts;
as concerns size, tripping protected loads. front panel versions (RD
“red”, closed contacts,
characteristics, breaking range).
independently of the toggle ABB RCDs obtained a lot of
capacity and accessories.
position. Any earth fault can be marks and approvals and offer A common range of toroidal
DS201 and DS202C combine immediately identified through the same “plus” advantages transformers is available for
protection against overcurrent the blue indicator, that signals of the other System pro M all the residual current relays.
2/2 ABB SACE

System Technical features F 200
pro M compact RCCBs F 200 series
®
TECHNICAL FEATURES
3 Electrical
Standards
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed)
features Poles
Rated current In A
Rated sensitivity I∆n A

Rated voltage Ue IEC V
UL/CSA V
Insulation voltage Ui V
Max. operating voltage of circuit test IEC V
UL/CSA V
Min. operating voltage of circuit test V
Rated frequency Hz
Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc=I∆c SCPD - fuse gG 100 A kA
kA
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50) Uimp kV
Dielectric test voltage at ind. freq. for 1 min. kV
Overvoltage category
Surge current resistance (wave 8/20) A
Mechanical Toggle
features Contact position indicator (CPI)
Electrical life
Mechanical life
Protection degree housing
terminals
Tropicalization humid heat °C/RH
acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2 constant climatic conditions °C/RH
variable climatic conditions °C/RH
Ambient temperature (with daily average ≤ +35 °C) IEC °C
UL/CSA °C
Storage temperature °C
Installation Terminal type
Terminal size top/bottom for cable IEC mm2
UL/CSA AWG
Terminal size top/bottom for busbar IEC mm2
UL/CSA AWG
Tightening torque IEC N*m
UL/CSA in-lbs.
Tool
Mounting
Connection
Withdrawal from busbar
Dimensions Dimensions (H x D x W) 2P mm
and weight 4P mm
Weight 2P g
4P g
Combination Combinable with: auxiliary contact
with auxiliary signal contact/auxiliary switch
elements shunt trip
undervoltage release
Ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment-component (up to 63 A)

prior to connection of aluminium conductors (≥ 4 mm2) ensure that their contact points are cleaned, brushed and coated with grease
3/4 ABB
System Technical features F 200
®
F200 AC F200 A F200 AC AP-R F200 A AP-R F200 AC S F200 A S F200 A 400 Hz F200 A 16 2/3 Hz
AC A
IEC/EN 61008, UL 1053
AC A AC A
IEC/EN 61008
A
IEC/EN 61008
A
3
2P, 4P (for 125 A only 4P) 4P 2P, 4P
16, 25, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125 25, 40, 63 25, 40, 63, 80, 40, 63 40, 63, 80, 100, 25, 40 63
100, 125 125
0.01-0.03-0.1-0.3-0.5 0.03 0.1-0.3-0.5-1 0.03 0.03-0.3-0.5
230/400 - 240/415
480Y/277 (up to 63 A) -
500
254 (440 for 125 A); 440 for F 200 left neutral 254 254
277 (up to 63 A); 480 for F 200 left neutral -
110 (185 for 125 A); 195 for F 200 left neutral 110 110
50…60 50...400 16 2/3
10 (for 125 A fuse is gG 125 A)
1 (1.25 for 125 A)
6
2.5
III, disconnector abilities
250 3000 5000 250 250
blue sealable in ON-OFF position
yes
10000 (2000 for 125 A) 10000 10000
20000 (5000 for 125 A) 20000 20000
IP4X
IP2X
28 cycles with 55/95…100
23/83 - 40/93 - 55/20
25/95 - 40/95
-25…+55 (-25...+40 for 125 A) -25...+55 -25...+55
-35…+70 (up to 63 A) -
-40…+70
failsafe bi-directional cylinder-lift terminal at top and bottom (shock protected) (cage for In > 63 A)
25/25 (35/35 single slot terminal for In > 63 A) 25/25 25/25
18-4 (up to 63 A) -
10/10 (not for In = 80-100 A) 10/10 10/10
18-8 (up to 63 A) -
2.8 (3 for In = 125 A) 2.8 2.8
25 (up to 63 A) -
Nr. 2 Pozidriv
on DIN rail EN 60715 (35 mm) by means of fast clip device
from top and bottom
it is possible without using any tools only from the bottom (not for 125 A)
85 x 69 x 35 -
85 x 69 x 70 (85 x 69.5 x 72 for 125 A) 85 x 69 x 70 85 x 69 x 70
200 -
350 (380 for In = 80 and 100 A and 460 for In = 125A) 350 350
yes (no for 125 A) yes yes
yes yes yes
ABB 3/5
System Selection tables F 200 AC
®
AC w type
F 200 AC type
AC Function: protection against the effects of sinusoidal alternating earth fault currents; protection against
indirect contacts and additional protection against direct (with I∆n=30 mA) contacts.
Application: residential, commercial, industrial.
Standard: IEC/EN 61008
Marking: according to EN 61008
Number Rated Rated Order Bbn Price Price Weight Pack

of poles residual current details 8012542 1 piece group 1 piece unit
3 current
I∆n mA In A Type code Order code EAN kg pc.
2CSC400565F0201
2 10 16 F202 AC-16/0.01 2CSF202001R0160 779902 0.225 1/6

30 25 F202 AC-25/0.03 2CSF202001R1250 780007 0.225 1/6
40 F202 AC-40/0.03 2CSF202001R1400 780106 0.225 1/6
63 F202 AC-63/0.03 2CSF202001R1630 780205 0.225 1/6
80 F202 AC-80/0.03 2CSF202001R1800 914204 0.225 1/6
100 F202 AC-100/0.03 2CSF202001R1900 914303 0.225 1/6
100 25 F202 AC-25/0.1 2CSF202001R2250 780304 0.225 1/6
40 F202 AC-40/0.1 2CSF202001R2400 780403 0.225 1/6
63 F202 AC-63/0.1 2CSF202001R2630 780502 0.225 1/6
80 F202 AC-80/0.1 2CSF202001R2800 914402 0.225 1/6
100 F202 AC-100/0.1 2CSF202001R2900 914501 0.225 1/6
300 25 F202 AC-25/0.3 2CSF202001R3250 780601 0.225 1/6
40 F202 AC-40/0.3 2CSF202001R3400 780700 0.225 1/6
63 F202 AC-63/0.3 2CSF202001R3630 780809 0.225 1/6
80 F202 AC-80/0.3 2CSF202001R3800 914600 0.225 1/6
2CSC400569F0201
100 F202 AC-100/0.3 2CSF202001R3900 914709 0.225 1/6

500 25 F202 AC-25/0.5 2CSF202001R4250 780908 0.225 1/6
40 F202 AC-40/0.5 2CSF202001R4400 781004 0.225 1/6
63 F202 AC-63/0.5 2CSF202001R4630 781103 0.225 1/6
80 F202 AC-80/0.5 2CSF202001R4800 914808 0.225 1/6
100 F202 AC-100/0.5 2CSF202001R4900 914907 0.225 1/6
4 30 25 F204 AC-25/0.03 2CSF204001R1250 781202 0.375 1/3

40 F204 AC-40/0.03 2CSF204001R1400 781301 0.375 1/3
63 F204 AC-63/0.03 2CSF204001R1630 781400 0.375 1/3
80 F204 AC-80/0.03 2CSF204001R1800 916604 0.405 1/3
100 F204 AC-100/0.03 2CSF204001R1900 916703 0.405 1/3
125 F204 AC-125/0.03 2CSF204001R1950 941507 0.500 1
100 25 F204 AC-25/0.1 2CSF204001R2250 781509 0.375 1/3
2CSC400197F0201
40 F204 AC-40/0.1 2CSF204001R2400 781608 0.375 1/3

63 F204 AC-63/0.1 2CSF204001R2630 781707 0.375 1/3
80 F204 AC-80/0.1 2CSF204001R2800 916802 0.405 1/3
100 F204 AC-100/0.1 2CSF204001R2900 916901 0.405 1/3
125 F204 AC-125/0.1 2CSF204001R2950 941606 0.500 1
300 25 F204 AC-25/0.3 2CSF204001R3250 781806 0.375 1/3
40 F204 AC-40/0.3 2CSF204001R3400 781905 0.375 1/3
63 F204 AC-63/0.3 2CSF204001R3630 782001 0.375 1/3
80 F204 AC-80/0.3 2CSF204001R3800 917007 0.405 1/3
100 F204 AC-100/0.3 2CSF204001R3900 917106 0.405 1/3
125 F204 AC-125/0.3 2CSF204001R3950 941705 0.500 1
500 25 F204 AC-25/0.5 2CSF204001R4250 782100 0.375 1/3
40 F204 AC-40/0.5 2CSF204001R4400 782209 0.375 1/3
63 F204 AC-63/0.5 2CSF204001R4630 782308 0.375 1/3
80 F204 AC-80/0.5 2CSF204001R4800 917205 0.405 1/3
100 F204 AC-100/0.5 2CSF204001R4900 917304 0.405 1/3
125 F204 AC-125/0.5 2CSF204001R4950 941804 0.500 1
Technical details .......................... pag. 11/76 Overall dimensions ........................ pag. 13/6
3/6 ABB
2CSC400189F0201
2CSC400187F0201 2CSC400263F0201
2CSC400258F0201
New System pro M compact
range of auxiliary elements
and accessories is universal:
in fact it is suitable for MCBs
S 200 and SN 201 range, for
RCDs F 200 range and also
for RCBOs DS 200 range and
it is useful in terms of stock
management.
The auxiliary elements range
(composed by auxiliary and
signal contacts, shunt trips,
undervoltage releases and
automatic reclosing units)
is quite wide and there are
4 different possible schemes
for assemblage with devi-
ces. Thus MCBs and RCDs
performances are improved,
2CSC400263F0201
even because innovative and
integrated solutions can be
used in every installation.
The connection accessories
range (busbars, connection
terminals, feeder terminals)
allows any kind of wiring. The
range of standard accessories
(labels, covers) permits to
customize the installation.
4/2 ABB
System Technical features
pro M compact Auxiliary elements and accessories for MCBs S 200 and
®
SN 201, RCDs F 200, DS201, DS202C and DS 200 series
Auxiliary contact and signal/auxiliary contact S2C-H6R, S2C-H11L, S2C-H20, S2C-H02 and S2C-S/H6R
Rated current A 10
Min. rated voltage UBmin AC V 24
DC V 24
Min. rated operational current/voltage 10 mA at 12 V; 5 mA at 24 V
Short-circuit withstand capacity V 230 a.c. 100A with S201 K4
Overvoltage category III
Surge voltage (1.2/50 ms) kV 4
Connection cross section mm2 0.75…2.5 (up to 2 x 1.5 mm2 for S2C-H11L, S2C-H20L and S2C-H02L)
Tightening torque Nm 1.2 (max. 0.8 for S2C-H11L, S2C-H20L and S2C-H02L)
Contact stability in vibration test according 5g, 20 sweep cycles 5…150…5 Hz at 24 V AC/DC, 5 mA
to DIN IEC 68-2-6 automatic reclosing < 10 ms
Mechanical service life 10000 operations
Dimensions (H x D x W) mm 85 x 69 x 8.8
Auxiliary contact and signal/auxiliary contact S2C-H6-11R, S2C-H6-20R, S2C-H6-02R
Rated current A 10
4 Min. rated voltage UBmin AC
DC
V
V
24
24
Min. rated operational current/voltage 10 mA at 12 V; 5 mA at 24 V
Overvoltage category III
Surge voltage (1.2/50 ms) kV 4
Connection cross section mm2 0.75…2.5
Tightening torque Nm 1.2
Mechanical service life 10000 operations
Bottom-fitting auxiliary contact S2C-H10 and S2C-H01
Contact complement 1NO (1 make contact), 1NC (1 normally closed contact), leading make contact, late closing
Contact load AC14 2 A/230 V - DC 12 identical DC13/DC13 1 A /50 V, 2 A/30 V
Min. rated voltage V 12 AC/DC at 0.1 VA
Short-circuit withstand capacity 230 VAC 1000 A, fault protection with S 201-K2 or Z2
Electrical serviceable life > 4000 switchover cycles
Standard VDE 0106 Part 101
Connection cross-section mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Tightening torque N*m 0.5
Signal auxiliary contact for F 200 125A and F 200 B F2 125A-S/H
Rated current AC A 6
DC A 1
Min. rated voltage Ub min AC V 230
DC V 110
Connection cross section mm2 1...1.5
Tightening torque Nm 0.8
Shunt trip for S 200 MCBs S2C-A1 S2C-A2
Rated voltage AC V 12…60 110…415
DC V 12…60 110…250
Max release duration ms <10 <10
Min. release voltage AC V 7 55
DC V 10 80
Consumption on release Ub V 12 DC 12 AC 24 DC 24 AC 60 DC 60 AC 110 DC 110 AC 220 DC 230 AC 415 AC
Ib max A 2.2 2.5 4.5 5 14 8.8 0.35 0.5 1.1 1.0 2.7
Coil resistance Ω 3.7 225
Terminals mm2 16 16
Tightening torque Nm 2.5 2.5
Dimensions (H x D x W) mm 85 x 69 x 17.5 85 x 69 x 17.5
Shunt trip for F 200 RCCBs F2C-A1 F2C-A2

Rated voltage AC V 12...60 110...415
DC V 12...60 110...250
Max release duration ms 10 10
Min. release voltage AC V 6 75
DC V 4.5 55
Consumption on release Ub V 12 DC 12 AC 24 DC 60 DC 60 AC 110 DC 110 AC 250 DC 415 AC
Ib max A 0.88 0.65 1.58 5.8 5 0.05 0.03 0.1 0.16
Coil resistance Ω 5.5 1355
Terminals mm2 2x1.5 2x1.5
Tightening torque Nm 0.2 0.2
Dimensions (H x D x W) mm 85 x 69 x 17.5 85 x 69 x 17.5
4/6 ABB
System Selection tables
pro M compact Auxiliary elements for MCBs S 200,
®
SN 201, RCDs F 200 and DS 200 series
Signal/auxiliary contacts
2CSC400465F0201
2CSC400324F0201
Function S2C-S/H6R: choice through a selector between indication of the position of the device’s
contacts and signalling of the fault (overcurrent/short-circuit for MCBs and RCBOs; earth fault for
RCCBs and RCBOs). Suitable for MCBs S 200 series, RCCBs F 200 series, RCBOs DS201, DS202C,
DS 200 series.
Function S2C-H6R: indication of the position of the device’s contacts. Suitable for MCBs S200 series.
To be mounted on the left side of the MCBs thanks to the special pin. They are not suitable to be
mounted together with RCD-block DDA200.
S2C-S/H6R S2C-H6-...
Function S2C-H6-xxR: indication of the position of the MCB contact. Mounted on the right side. They
5SEDAS !UTOMATIC -ANUAL are not suitabel to be mounted together with RCD-block DDA200 and/or other auxiliary contacts.
SIGNALCONTACT OPENING OPENING

Description Order Bbn Price Price Weight Pack

S2C-S/H6R details 4016779 1 piece group 1 piece unit

Type code Order code EAN kg pc.
8VHGDV $XWRPDWLF 0DQXDO

Signal contact/
4 S2C-H6R
DX[LOLDU\FRQWDFW RSHQLQJ

RSHQLQJ

auxiliary switch 1CO
Auxiliary contact 1CO
S2C-S/H6R
S2C-H6R
2CDS200922R0001
2CDS200912R0001
563819
563826
0.04
0.04
1
1
Auxiliary contact 1NO/1NC S2C-H6-11R 2CDS200946R0001 697941 0.04 1
Auxiliary contact 2NO S2C-H6-20R 2CDS200946R0002 697958 0.04 1
\ S J S J Auxiliary contact 2NC S2C-H6-02R 2CDS200946R0003 697965 0.04 1
11 13 1 11 13 1 11 13 1
S2C-H6-11R Auxiliary contacts mounting on the left side

12 14 2 12 14 2 12 14 2
\ S J S J
details 4016779 1 piece group 1 piece unit
13 23 1 13 23 1 13 23 1
S2C-H6-20R Auxiliary contact 1 NO/1NC S2C-H11L 2CDS200936R0001 648820 0.04 1
14 24 2 14 24 2 14 24 2
Auxiliary contact 2 NO S2C-H20L 2CDS200936R0002 648837 0.04 1
\ S J S J Auxiliary contact 2 NC S2C-H02L 2CDS200936R0003 648844 0.04 1
11 21 1 11 21 1 11 21 1
S2C-H6-02R
Bottom-fitting auxiliary contacts for S 200, S 200 M, S 200 P
12 22 2 12 22 2 12 22 2
1 NC S 2C-H01 2CDS 200 970 R0001 64551 5 0.01 1
1 NO S 2C-H10 2CDS 200 970 R0002 64552 2 0.01 1
2CSC400155F0201
packing unit 15 parts
1 NC S 2C-H01 15x 2CDS 200 970 R0011 64677 2 0.01 15

1 NO S 2C-H10 15x 2CDS 200 970 R0012 64681 9 0.01 15
Auxiliary contact bridge for bottom-fitting auxiliary contacts

2CSC400682F0001
Wire jumper for integrated auxiliary contact (MCB S 200 H or auxiliary contacts S2C-H01/S2C-H10
for series connections (HKB) or parallel connections (HKB1).
1/2 mod. HKB GH V036 0504 R0100 523134 0.001 1000

1 mod. HKB 1 GH V036 0504 R0101 524209 0.001 1000
:*:/9
Signal contact for SN201 MCBs
5SEDAS !UTOMATIC
SIGNALCONTACT OPENING
-ANUAL
OPENING
Function: indication of the device contact positions only after the automatic release of the MCBs

due to overcurrent.
2CSC400681F0001
Signal contact 1NO + 1 NC SN201-S 2CSS200924R0001 104957 0.040 1
Auxiliary contact / interface module for SN201 MCBs

Function: indication of the device contact positions. The auxiliary contact can be used as an interface
module between SN201 and other compact auxiliary elements.
3# (2
5SEDAS !UTOMATIC -ANUAL
AUXILIARYCONTACT OPENING OPENING
Interface module/Aux.
Contact 1NO+1NC SN201-IH 2CSS200923R0001 104858 0.050 1

Overall dimensions ...................... pag. 13/13
4/12 ABB
System Selection tables Accessories S 200,
pro M compact Accessories for S 200, SN 201,
®
SN 201, F 200, DS 200
F 200, DS 200 and other series and other series

2CDC051130F0008
Elevation piece
Compensates for different size of built-in devices with a mounting height of 68 mm and power MCBs
of series S500 (83 mm)
SZ-ES 68/83
SZ-ES 68/83 GH V021 1425 R0001 53390 9 0.003 100
2CSC400453F0201
Locking device for MCBs and switches

Prevents unauthorised or dangerous operation of the operating lever. An adaptor makes it possible
to block the operating lever whether switched ON or OFF. The lever is blocked with a padlock having
a cross bar section of 3 or, as the case may be, 6 mm max. For multipole devices, one lock may
4 SA 1
be fitted per pole.
The lock adaptor can be used for all MCBs of the S 220, S 280 series as well as for switches E 200.
The lock adaptor SA 1/S 290 can be used for all MCBs of the S 290 series.
2CSC400454F0201
locking devices 3 mm SA 1 GJ F110 1903 R0001 58760 5 ➁ 0.004 10

for padlock bar 6 mm SA 1E GJ F110 1903 R0004 58790 2 ➁ 0.004 10
locking devices 3 mm SA 1/S 290 GJ F110 1903 R0007 58261 2 ➀ 0.004 10
SA 2 for S 290, padlock bar
padlock with 2 keys SA 2 GJ F110 1903 R0002 58770 4 ➁ 0.02 10
padlock, identical
96940 1 ➁
2CSC400053F0201
locking with 2 keys SA 2 i GJ F110 9999 R0001 0.02 10

lock adaptor incl. padlock
with 3 keys
in transparent box SA 3 GJ F110 1903 R0003 58780 3 ➁ 0.05 10
Terminal cover KA 27
Provides overall touch protection of live parts. Suitable for installations acc. to DIN EN 50274 (DIN
VDE 0660 Part 514) and BGV A2.
End parts can be snapped onto mounting rails EN 60 715, 35 mm. Covers are 486 mm = 27 modules
KA 27 H + KA 27 S
(18 mm each) long. Knockouts for each half module for individualised use.
cover, 1 piece KA 27 H GH S210 1933 R0001 13630 8 0.104 10

end part, 1 piece KA 27 S GH S210 1934 R0001 13640 7 0.027 10
2CSC400435F0201
Terminal covers with base plate, protection IP 40

Material: high-impact and flame-retardant (UL 94 V-0), color: white (RAL 9001), glow-wire test 960
°C according to IEC 695-2-1
The base plate has an integrated top-hat rail for snap-on fixing of MCBs, RCDs, modular built-in
PCD 2 N PCD 4 N devices, etc.
for 2 modules PCD 2 N GH S270 1921 R0002 12402 6 ➀ 0.09 1

GH S270 1921 R0006 12406 4 ➀
2CSC400437F0201
for 6 modules PCD 6 N 0.2 1

Common terminals for terminal covers PCD

PCD 8 N
for PCD 4 N and 6 N KL-PCD 4/6 GH S270 1912 R0004 12502 3 ➀ 0.017
for PCD 8 N KL-PCD 8 GH S270 1912 R0008 12592 7 ➀ 0.079
➀ bbn-No. 80 00126 ➁ bbn-No. 40 16779
Overall dimensions ...................... pag. 13/18
4/42 ABB
The following chapter shows Insulation monitoring
other protection devices in devices
addition to the MCBs and
Moreover ABB offers a wide
RCDs ones.:
range of insulation monitoring
Surge protective devices devices:
OVR: they are aimed at
For medical location
protecting electrical and
- ISOLTESTER/ SELVTESTER
electronic equipment against
insulation monitoring
overvoltages and impulse
devices for medical
currents (such as switching
locations
and lighting surges).
- QSD remote signalling panel
SPDs feature the following
two functions: For industrial environments
- they limit overvoltage to - ISL insulation monitoring
a level acceptable by the devices
equipment to be protected
- they divert surge currents TI insulating transformers for
medical use: permanently
Fuse holders can protect connected to an IT power
against short circuits and supply system they provide
overloads. galvanic separation between
the distribution network and
They are available in the
the loads.
following versions:
- E 90 fuse switch QSO Complete electrical
disconnectors that can switchboard for medical
disconnect circuits under locations : they are the ideal
load solution for distribution within
- E 90 and E 930 fuse group II medical locations,
holders ranges suitable allowing monitoring of all
for use with gG and aM network parameters.
cylindrical fuse
- E 90 PV fuse
disconnectors, designed
for operating voltages of
1000 V d.c. with utilization
category DC-20
Cylindrical fuses
gG and aM cylindrical fuse
series to protect against
short circuits and overloads.
The range can cover a wide
range of sizes, up to 690 V
AC, and in PV version up to
1000 V DC. The E 9F series
is the ideal completion for
the ABB range of E 90 fuse
switch disconnectors, E 9F
fuseholders and E 930 fuse
disconnectors.
System Selection tables E 90
pro M compact Protection devices
®
E 90 fuse switch disconnectors

E 90 series fuse switch disconnectors are designed for switching circuits under load, providing protection
against short circuits and overloads. The case is made of self-extinguishing thermoplastic material resistant
2CSC400696F0201
to high temperatures (all materials are UL listed) while the contact clips are in silver plated copper.
E 90 fuse switch disconnectors can be sealed or padlocked to ensure operator safety during maintenan-
ce. Versions with blown fuse indicator allow to check whether the fuse is still working correctly or not. For
easy and quick installation E 90 range is totally compatible with connecting bars, terminals and caps of
S 200 MCBs.
Thanks to cURus approval, they can be installed in UL certified machines.
38 mm Ø 10.3 mm
E 90 fuse switch disconnectors for 10.3 x 38 mm fuses (AC-22B)
Poles Rated Modules Order Bbn Price Price Weight Pack
2CSC400694F0201
current details 8012542 1 piece group 1 piece unit

In Type code Order code EAN kg pc.
1 32 1 E 91/32 2CSM200923R1801 009238 0.061 6
1 32 1 E 91/32s 2CSM202483R1801 024835 0.062 6
1+N 32 2 E 91N/32 2CSM200893R1801 008934 0.130 3
2 32 2 E 92/32 2CSM200883R1801 008835 0.122 3
3 32 3 E 93/32 2CSM204753R1801 047537 0.183 2
5 3+N
4
32
32
4
4
E 93N/32
E 94/32
2CSM204733R1801
2CSM204723R1801
047339
047230
0.252
0.244
1
1
s: version with blown fuse indicator light
E 90 fuse switch disconnectors for 8.5 x 31.5 mm fuses (AC-22B) 31.5 mm Ø 8.5 mm
1 20 1 E 91/20 2CSM200983R1801 009832 0.061 6

1 20 1 E 91/20s 2CSM202423R1801 024231 0.062 6
2 20 2 E 92/20 2CSM200953R1801 009535 0.122 3
3 20 3 E 93/20 2CSM200943R1801 009436 0.183 2
s: version with blown fuse indicator light
Technical details ........................ pag. 11/127 Overall dimensions ...................... pag. 13/28 Application sheets ......................... pag. 12/5
5/12 ABB
®
Technical features
Type E 90/20 E 90/32
Fuse [mm] 8 x 31 10 x 38
Current type a.c. / d.c.
Rated frequency [Hz] = / 50-60
Rated current [A] 20 32
Max power dissipation [W] 2.5 3
Tightening torque [Nm] PZ2 2-2.5
Terminal cross section [mm2] 25
Protection degree IP20
Can be padlocked (open) ■
Can be sealed (closed) ■
IEC 60947-3
Rated operating voltage [V] 400 400
Utilization category AC-22B
Markings IMQ, NF
Alternate current characteristics according to IEC 60947-3
Utilization category AC-22B
Direct current characteristics according to IEC 60947-3
5
Utilization category DC-20B*
IEC 60269-1
Rated a.c. voltage [V] 400 690
Rated d.c. voltage [V] 400 690
IEC 60269-2
Fuse system F
Breaking capacity [kA] 200 (a.c.) – 100 (d.c.)
IEC 60269-3
Fuse system B
Rated a.c. voltage [V] 400
IEC 60269-4
Fuse system F
UL 4248
Markings cURus
* If the product is used with direct current, switching under load is not permitted. In this case, the warning “do not open under
load” must be visible in the front of the device.
Electrical symbols
2CSC400030F0202
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
ABB 5/13
®

Materials
Plastic parts Case: Material PA 6 +30% glass fibre

Self extinguishing class: V2 (UL94)
Temperature resistance: 130 °C
Opening handle Material PA 66 +25% glass fibre
Self-extinguishing class V0 (UL94)
Temperature resistance: 140 °C
Metal parts Clips Silver plated copper

Clip spring Stainless steel
Terminals Galvanized steel
The E 90 series is environmental friendly and protects the health of people: all used materials are
conform to the RoHS and REACH directives and they completely exclude hazardous substances
and halogen.
5 Utilization category
Current type Utilization category Typical applications

Alternating current AC-20A - AC-20B Connecting and disconnecting under no load (in this case the
devices must be marked “Do not disconnect under load”)
AC-21A - AC-21B Switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloads
AC-22A - AC-22B Switching of mixed resistive/inductive loads,
including moderate overloads
AC-23A - AC-23B Switching of motors and other highly inductive loads
Direct current DC-20A - DC-20B Connecting and disconnecting under no load (in this case
the devices must be marked “Do not open under load”)
DC-21A - DC-21B Switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloads
DC-22A - DC-22B Switching of mixed resistive / inductive loads,
including moderate overloads
DC-23A - DC-23B Switching of motors or other highly inductive loads
Suffix A Frequent use

Suffix B Infrequent use
Wiring of E 90 with blown fuse indicator light in alternate current
Supply Load For direct current systems please refer

to E 90 PV wiring diagram
2CSC400357F0902
Load Supply
Technical details ........................ pag. 11/127 Overall dimensions ...................... pag. 13/28
5/14 ABB
System Selection tables E 9F
®
Cylindrical fuses E 9F
Protection system selection

Maximum fuse rated current
Fuseholder
E 90/20 E 90/32 E 930/50 E 930/125
Rated voltage
8.5 x 31.5 mm 10.3 x 38 mm 14 x 51 mm 22 x 58 mm
gG 20 A 32 A 50 A 125 A
400 V a.c.
aM 10 A 32 A 50 A 125 A
gG - 25 A 40 A 100 A
500 V a.c.
aM - 25 A 40 A 100 A
gG - 10 A 25 A 80 A
690 V a.c.
aM - - 25 A 80 A
In the table above you will find indication about the highest rated current fuse that you can host
inside a fuseholder, depending on the rated voltage of the circuit, the fuse size and the tripping curve
characteristic.
5 ABB fuses and fuseholders comply with all regulatory requirements and sometimes they allow
to install a fuse with rated current higher than the one set by the Standard IEC EN 60269-2-1.
Multiple poles pole installation

E 91/32 E 91hN/32
Poles Maximum current Poles Maximum current
1...4 In 1...3 In
5...7 0.8 x In 4...9 0.7 x In
more than 0.7 x In more than 10 0.6 x In
Climate conditions
Maximum temperature 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
Maximum humidity 95% 90% 80% 50%
Maximum current In In x 0.95 In x 0.9 In x 0.8
In case of several paired poles or installation in special climate conditions, take into account the
derating parameters listed in the table according to rated current, the number of paired poles or
temperature and relative humidity.
5/22 ABB
System Selection tables E 9F gG
®
Cylindrical fuses E 9F gG
E 9F gG cylindrical fuses
The E 9F gG cylindrical fuses, coupled with E 90 and E 930 fuse disconnectors, are the ideal solution
for protection against overload and short-circuit. They feature a fast tripping curve that is ideal for
protecting electronic devices, transformers and electric cables. The E 9F gG series is available for
all the main sizes (8.5 x 31.5 mm, 10.3 x 38 mm, 14 x 51 mm e 22 x 58 mm) and with a wide range
of rated current values (from 1 A to 125 A and up to 690 V a.c.). All the E 9F series fuses conform
to the RoHS directive and are type-approved in accordance with the most important international
naval marks.
E 9F 8 gG cylindrical fuses 8.5 x 31.5 mm 31.5 mm Ø 8.5 mm

2CSC400037F0202
Rated Size Order Bbn Price Price Weight Pack

In mm Type code Order code EAN kg pc.
1 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG1 2CSM257573R1801 575733 0.004 10
2 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG2 2CSM256393R1801 563938 0.004 10
4 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG4 2CSM258663R1801 586630 0.004 10
6 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG6 2CSM257483R1801 574835 0.004 10
8 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG8 2CSM256303R1801 563037 0.004 10
10
12
8.5x31.5
8.5x31.5
E 9F8 GG10
E 9F8 GG12
2CSM277573R1801
2CSM277353R1801
775737
773535
0.004
0.004
10
10 5
16 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG16 2CSM277133R1801 771333 0.004 10
20 8.5x31.5 E 9F8 GG20 2CSM277503R1801 775034 0.004 10
E 9F 10 gG cylindrical fuses 10.3 x 38 mm 38 mm Ø 10.3 mm

2CSC400038F0202

0.5 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG05 2CSM277333R1801 773337 0.007 10
1 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG1 2CSM277113R1801 771135 0.007 10
2 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG2 2CSM258723R1801 587231 0.007 10
4 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG4 2CSM257543R1801 575436 0.007 10
6 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG6 2CSM256363R1801 563631 0.007 10
8 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG8 2CSM258633R1801 586333 0.007 10
10 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG10 2CSM257453R1801 574538 0.007 10
12 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG12 2CSM256273R1801 562733 0.007 10
16 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG16 2CSM277543R1801 775430 0.007 10
20 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG20 2CSM277323R1801 773238 0.007 10
25 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG25 2CSM277103R1801 771036 0.007 10
32 10.3x38 E 9F10 GG32 2CSM258713R1801 587132 0.007 10
E 9F 14 gG cylindrical fuses 14 x 51 mm 51 mm Ø 14 mm
2CSC400039F0202

2 14x51 E 9F14 GG2 2CSM277523R1801 775232 0.018 10
4 14x51 E 9F14 GG4 2CSM277303R1801 773030 0.018 10
6 14x51 E 9F14 GG6 2CSM277083R1801 770831 0.018 10
8 14x51 E 9F14 GG8 2CSM291003R1801 910039 0.018 10
10 14x51 E 9F14 GG10 2CSM290983R1801 909835 0.018 10
12 14x51 E 9F14 GG12 2CSM290963R1801 909637 0.018 10
16 14x51 E 9F14 GG16 2CSM258783R1801 587835 0.018 10
20 14x51 E 9F14 GG20 2CSM257603R1801 576037 0.018 10
25 14x51 E 9F14 GG25 2CSM256423R1801 564232 0.018 10
32 14x51 E 9F14 GG32 2CSM258693R1801 586937 0.018 10
40 14x51 E 9F14 GG40 2CSM257513R1801 575139 0.018 10
50 14x51 E 9F14 GG50 2CSM256333R1801 563334 0.018 10
ABB 5/23
®
58 mm Ø 22 mm
E 9F 22 gG cylindrical fuses 22 x 58 mm
2CSC400040F0202

4 22x58 E 9F22 GG4 2CSM257183R1801 571834 0.048 10
6 22x58 E 9F22 GG6 2CSM259283R1801 592839 0.048 10
8 22x58 E 9F22 GG8 2CSM258103R1801 581031 0.048 10
10 22x58 E 9F22 GG10 2CSM256923R1801 569237 0.048 10
12 22x58 E 9F22 GG12 2CSM259403R1801 594031 0.048 10
16 22x58 E 9F22 GG16 2CSM258223R1801 582236 0.048 10
20 22x58 E 9F22 GG20 2CSM257043R1801 570431 0.048 10
25 22x58 E 9F22 GG25 2CSM259533R1801 595335 0.048 10
32 22x58 E 9F22 GG32 2CSM258353R1801 583530 0.048 10
40 22x58 E 9F22 GG40 2CSM257173R1801 571735 0.048 10
50 22x58 E 9F22 GG50 2CSM259393R1801 593935 0.048 10
63 22x58 E 9F22 GG63 2CSM258213R1801 582137 0.048 10
80 22x58 E 9F22 GG80 2CSM257033R1801 570332 0.048 10
100 22x58 E 9F22 GG100 2CSM259523R1801 595236 0.048 10
125 22x58 E 9F22 GG125 2CSM258343R1801 583431 0.048 10
5
Technical features
Rated voltage [V] 400, 500, 690 AC
Rated current [A] 0,5…125
Breaking capacity [kA] 20, 80, 120
Overall dimensions [mm] 8.5x31.5 , 10.3x38 , 14x51 , 22x58
Weight [g] 4, 7, 18, 48
Standards IEC 60269-2; ROHS 2002/98/CE
Marks LLOYD, NF, BV
E 9F 8 gG cylindrical fuses 8.5 x 31.5 mm E 9F 10 gG cylindrical fuses 10.3 x 38 mm

Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity
[A] [V AC] [kA] [A] [V AC] [kA]
E 9F8 GG1 1 400 20 E 9F10 GG05 0.5 500 120
E 9F8 GG2 2 400 20 E 9F10 GG1 1 500 120
E 9F8 GG4 4 400 20 E 9F10 GG2 2 500 120
E 9F8 GG6 6 400 20 E 9F10 GG4 4 500 120
E 9F8 GG8 8 400 20 E 9F10 GG6 6 500 120
E 9F8 GG10 10 400 20 E 9F10 GG8 8 500 120
E 9F8 GG12 12 400 20 E 9F10 GG10 10 500 120
E 9F8 GG16 16 400 20 E 9F10 GG12 12 500 120
E 9F8 GG20 20 400 20 E 9F10 GG16 16 500 120
E 9F10 GG20 20 500 120
E 9F10 GG25 25 500 120
E 9F10 GG32 32 400 120
E 9F 14 gG cylindrical fuses 14 x 51 mm E 9F 22 gG cylindrical fuses 22 x 58 mm

Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity
[A] [V AC] [kA] [A] [V AC] [kA]
E 9F14 GG2 2 690 80 E 9F22 GG4 4 690 80
E 9F14 GG4 4 690 80 E 9F22 GG6 6 690 80
E 9F14 GG6 6 690 80 E 9F22 GG8 8 690 80
E 9F14 GG8 8 690 80 E 9F22 GG10 10 690 80
E 9F14 GG10 10 690 80 E 9F22 GG12 12 690 80
E 9F14 GG12 12 690 80 E 9F22 GG16 16 690 80
E 9F14 GG16 16 690 80 E 9F22 GG20 20 690 80
E 9F14 GG20 20 690 80 E 9F22 GG25 25 690 80
E 9F14 GG25 25 690 80 E 9F22 GG32 32 690 80
E 9F14 GG32 32 500 120 E 9F22 GG40 40 690 80
E 9F14 GG40 40 500 120 E 9F22 GG50 50 690 80
E 9F14 GG50 50 400 120 E 9F22 GG63 63 690 80
E 9F22 GG80 80 690 80
E 9F22 GG100 100 500 120
E 9F22 GG125 125 400 120
5/24 ABB
®
Power dissipation [W]
In Size
[A] 10.3x38 14x51 22x58
0.5 2
1 2.5 3.4
2 0.70 1 1.20
4 0.80 1.10 1.30
6 0.90 1.20 1.40
8 1.10 1.50 1.65
10 1.35 1.80 2
12 1.55 2.10 2.40
16 1.90 2.55 3
20 2.30 3 3.40
25 2.80 3.50 3.80
32 3 3.80 4.30
40 4.40 5.10
50 4.70 5.50
63 6.70
80 8
100
125
9
12.5 5
It is important verify that the power dissipation by the fuse does not exceed the limit allowed by the fuse it is
hosted. In blue are shown the maximum values of power dissipation according with the range E 90 and E 930
specifications.
Characteristics tI

2CSC400041F0202

ABB 5/25
®
Characteristics I2t

5

2CSC400042F0202

Temperature increase
°

2CSC400042F0202

! " " "
5/26 ABB
System Technical details MCBs
pro M compact Tripping characteristics
®
Tripping characteristics
Thermal release Electromagnetic release
Acc. to Tripping characteristic Current: Tripping time Currents: Tripping time
and rated current conventional conventional hold trip
non-tripping c. tripping c. current at least at
surges
IEC/EN 60898-1 B 6 to 63 A 1.13 · In >1h 3 · In > 0.1 s

1.45 · In <1h 5 · In < 0.1 s
C 0.5 to 63 A 1.13 · In >1h 5 · In > 0.1 s
1.45 · In <1h 10 · In < 0.1 s
D 0.5 to 63 A 1.13 · In >1h 10 · In > 0.1 s
1.45 · In <1h 20 · In < 0.1 s
IEC/EN 60947-2 K 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In >1h
1.2 · In <1h not applicable
1.05 · In >2h 10 · In > 0.2 s
1.2 · In <1h 14 · In < 0.2 s
IEC/EN 60947-2 Z 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In >1h
1.2 · In <1h not applicable
1.05 · In >2h 2 · In > 0.2 s
1.2 · In <1h 3 · In < 0.2 s
The indicated tripping values of electromagnetic tripping devices apply to a The thermal releases are calibrated to a nominal reference ambient temperature;
frequency range of 16 2/3...60 Hz. In the case of diverging frequencies or direct for Z and K, the value is 20 °C, for B and C = 30 °C. In the case of higher ambient
current, see paragraph “Variation of tripping threshold of MCBs, according to temperatures, the current values fall by ca. 6 % for each 10 K temperature rise.
network frequency” (page 6/7) As from operating temperature (after I1 > 1 h or, as applicable, 2 h).
Tripping behavior S 700

Tripping Rated Delayed thermal release Short-time delayed selective tripping device
charakteristic current
Conventional non- Conventional Tripping time Delayed Short-time Tripping time
tripping current ➀ tripping current ➀ tripping delayed tripping
IInt IIt t IItv IItk t
E 1.05 x ln 2h 5 x ln 0.05 s < t < 5 s (ln 32 A)

10 to 100 A 0.05 s < t < 10 s (ln > 32 A)
1.2 x ln <2h 6.25 x ln 0.01 s < t < 0.3 s
K 16 to 50 A 1,05 x ln 2h 10 x ln 0.05 s < t < 5 s (ln 32 A)
0.05 s < t < 10 s (ln > 32 A)
1,2 x ln <2h 14 x ln 0.01 s < t < 0.3 s
63 to 100 A 1,05 x ln 2h 8 x ln 0.05 s < t < 10 s
1,2 x ln <2h 12 x ln 0.01 s < t < 0.3 s
➀ The thermal trip values refer to a reference temperature of 20 °C. For higher ambient temperatures the current rating will be reduced by 3 % per 10 °C decrease.
11
Selection tables ............................... pag. 2/2
11/2 ABB
pro M compact Tripping characteristics
®
Characteristic B Characteristic C
IEC-EN60898 IEC-EN60898
Tripping curve Tripping curve

from cold state from cold state
Minutes
Minutes
Seconds
Seconds
2CSC400400F0202
2CSC400400F0202
Multiples of rated current Multiples of rated current
a thermal trip
b electromagnetic trip
11
ABB 11/3
pro M compact Limitation of specific
®
let-through energy I2t
Limitation of specific let-through energy

Tripping of an installation circuit by circuit-breaker when there is a short-circuit requires a certain
amount of time depending on the characteristics of the circuit-breaker and the entity of the short-circuit
current. During this period of time, some or all of the short-circuit current flows into the installation;
the parameter I2t defines the “specific let-through energy”, ie. the specific energy that the breaker
allows through when there is a short-circuit current Icc during the tripping time t.
In this way, we can determine the capacity of a circuit-breaker to limit, ie. break high currents up to
the rated breaking power of the device, by reducing the peak value of the above-mentioned currents
to a value which is considerably lower than the estimated current.
This can be achieved using mechanisms which open very rapidly and have the following advanta-
ges:
- they limit the thermal and dynamic effects both on the circuit-breaker and on the protected circuit;
- they reduce the dimensions of the current-limiting circuit-breaker without reducing breaking capacity;
- they considerably reduce ionized gases and sparklers emitted during the short-circuit and therefore
they avoid the danger of ignition and fires.
Irms = perspective simmetrical short-circuit current
, 1
, 2
U t U tv
tv uM
uB uB
t=0
t=0
,2 t
KM ,2 iK
uM
M
OEPM0092ne
OEPM0092ne
iK
iK
t
Non-current limiting circuit-breaker

Current limiting circuit-breaker
Oscillogram of short-circuit
breaks on two circuit-breakers: Short-circuit current
red = effective short-circuit
1 = traditional non-current current squared
limiting circuit-breaker blue = estimated short-circuit
2 = current limiting circuit- current squared (shun-
breaker ted circuit-breaker)
uB = arc voltage (red) iKM = maximum values of
uM = rest voltage (blue) symmetrical component
of short-circuit current
squared
shaded in
red = specific let-through
energy in two cases
11
Limiting of let-through energy
Main selective circuit breakers like S 700 support downstream mcbs in clearing short-circuit currents.
They additionally reduce let-through energies without tripping. This increases the operational availability
of the electrical supply and reduces drawbacks to the feeding grid and the installed equipment.
s0079z01
ABB 11/7
®

Max. withstanding specific let-through energy of cables
Section
mm2 PVC EPR HEPR
50 33,062,500 39,062,500 51,122,500
35 16,200,625 19,140,625 25,050,025
25 8,265,625 9,765,625 12,780,625
16 3,385,600 4,000,000 5,234,944
10 1,322,500 1,562,500 2,044,900
6 476,100 562,500 736,164
4 211,600 250,000 327,184
2.5 82,656 97,656 127,806
1.5 29,756 35,156 46,010
The selection of the cables depends both from the breakers’ specific let-through energy and from carrying capacity and voltage
drop of the line.
Data of the previous table are referred to the following cables:

PVC EPR HEPR
FM9 H07RN-F N07G9-K
FM9OZ1 FTG10OM1
N07V-K RG7OR
FROR FG7OM1
FG7OR
Designation
Cable’s reference to the standards harmonized H

national cable recognized by CENELC A
Rated voltage Uo/U 100/100 ≤ Uo/U < 300/300 01
300/300 V 03
300/500 V 05
450/750 V 07
750/1000 V 1
Insulating materials and non-metallic sheath ethylene-vinylacetate G
mineral M
polyvinyl chloride V
Conductor’s shape flexible conductor of a cable for fixed installation K
Some cables on the market are identified with different names according with the designation UNEL 35011.
11
11/8 ABB
®
I2t diagrams - Specific let-through energy value I2t

The I2t curves give the values of the specific let-through energy expressed in A2s (A=amps; s=seconds)
in relation to the perspective short-circuit current (Irms) in kA.
S 200-S 200 M-S 200 P, characteristics B and C

DS 200-DS 200 M, characteristics B and C
230/400 V let-through energy
50/60 A 32/40 A
2.5 mm2
97.656 EPR 127.806 HEPR 5

82.656 PVC
10 20/25 A
46.010 HEPR 13/16 A
1.5 mm2
35.156 EPR 10 A
29.756 PVC
6A
4
10 4A
I2t [A2s]
3A
3
10
2A
1.6 A
1A
2
10
2CSC400402F0202
0.1 1 10 100
S 200 S 200 P
DS 200
S 200 M
Irms [kA] DS 200 M
S 200-S 200 M-S 200 P, characteristics D-K

230/400 V let-through energy
6
10
50/63 A 20/32 A
40 A
2.5 mm2
97.656 EPR 127.806 HEPR 5

82.656 PVC
10 20 A
13/16 A
46.010 HEPR
1.5 mm2
35.156 EPR 10 A
29.756 PVC
6A
4
10
11
I2t [A2s]
4A
3A
3 2A
10
1.6 A
1A
2CSC400403F0202
10 2
0.1 1 10 100
S 200 S 200 M S 200 P
Irms [kA]
For further information about the selection of the cable, please look at the table in page 10/3
ABB 11/9
pro M compact Performances at different ambient
®
temperatures, altitudes and frequencies
Derating of load capability of MCBs

Derating of MCBs load capability takes in consideration 3 factors:
- ambient temperature
- continuity (duration) of the load
- influence of adjacent devices
The rules to obtain the effective value of In are the following:

1. Deviating ambient temperature:
The rated value of the current of a miniature circuit-breaker refers to a temperature of 20 °C for
circuit-breakers with characteristics K and Z and 30 °C for characteristics B, C and D.
The following tables contain the derating of load capability of S 200/M/P MCBs* with temperature
from -40 °C to 70 °C for the curves B, C, D and K, Z.
S200, DS200 and DS271

Max. operating current depending on the ambient temperature of a circuit-breaker in load circuit of characteristics type B, C and D
B, C and D Ambient temperature T (°C)

In (A) - 40 - 30 - 20 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
0.5 0.67 0.65 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.50 0.47 0.44 0.41 0.37
1.0 1.33 1.29 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.11 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.75
1.6 2.13 2.07 2.00 1.92 1.85 1.77 1.69 1.60 1.51 1.41 1.31 1.19
2.0 2.67 2.58 2.49 2.40 2.31 2.21 2.11 2.00 1.89 1.76 1.63 1.49
3.0 4.0 3.9 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.3 3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.2
4.0 5.3 5.2 5.0 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.2 4.0 3.8 3.5 3.3 3.0
6.0 8.0 7.7 7.5 7.2 6.9 6.6 6.3 6.0 5.7 5.3 4.9 4.5
8.0 10.7 10.3 10.0 9.6 9.2 8.8 8.4 8.0 7.5 7.1 6.5 6.0
10.0 13.3 12.9 12.5 12.0 11.5 11.1 10.5 10.0 9.4 8.8 8.2 7.5
13.0 17.3 16.8 16.2 15.6 15.0 14.4 13.7 13.0 12.3 11.5 10.6 9.7
16.0 21.3 20.7 20.0 19.2 18.5 17.7 16.9 16.0 15.1 14.1 13.1 11.9
20.0 26.7 25.8 24.9 24.0 23.1 22.1 21.1 20.0 18.9 17.6 16.3 14.9
25.0 33.3 32.3 31.2 30.0 28.9 27.6 26.4 25.0 23.6 22.0 20.4 18.6
32.0 42.7 41.3 39.9 38.5 37.0 35.4 33.7 32.0 30.2 28.2 26.1 23.9
40.0 53.3 51.6 49.9 48.1 46.2 44.2 42.2 40.0 37.7 35.3 32.7 29.8
50.0 66.7 64.5 62.4 60.1 57.7 55.3 52.7 50.0 47.1 44.1 40.8 37.3
63.0 84.0 81.3 78.6 75.7 72.7 69.6 66.4 63.0 59.4 55.6 51.4 47.0
80.0 112.6 107.2 102.1 97.2 92.6 88.2 84.0 80.0 76.0 72.2 68.6 65.2
100.0 140.7 134.0 127.6 121.6 115.8 110.3 105.0 100.0 95.0 90.3 85.7 81.5
125.0 175.9 167.5 159.5 151.9 144.7 137.8 131.3 125.0 118.8 112.8 107.2 101.8
DS271 where In available. Ambient temperature -25…+55°C
S200 and DS200

Max. operating current depending on the ambient temperature of a circuit-breaker in load circuit of characteristics type K and Z
K and Z Ambient temperature T (°C)

In (A) - 40 - 30 - 20 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
0.5 0.66 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.56 0.53 0.50 0.47 0.43 0.40 0.35 0.31
11 1.0
1.6
1.32
2.12
1.27
2.04
1.22
1.96
1.17
1.88
1.12
1.79
1.06
1.70
1.00
1.60
0.94
1.50
0.87
1.39
0.79
1.26
0.71
1.13
0.61
0.98
2.0 2.65 2.55 2.45 2.35 2.24 2.12 2.00 1.87 1.73 1.58 1.41 1.22
3.0 4.0 3.8 3.7 3.5 3.4 3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.1 1.8
4.0 5.3 5.1 4.9 4.7 4.5 4.2 4.0 3.7 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4
6.0 7.9 7.6 7.3 7.0 6.7 6.4 6.0 5.6 5.2 4.7 4.2 3.7
8.0 10.8 10.2 9.8 9.4 8.9 8.5 8.0 7.5 6.9 6.3 5.7 4.9
10.0 13.2 12.7 12.2 11.7 11.2 10.6 10.0 9.4 8.7 7.9 7.1 6.1
13.0 17.2 16.6 15.9 15.2 14.5 13.8 13.0 12.2 11.3 10.3 9.2 8.0
16.0 21.2 20.4 19.6 18.8 17.9 17.0 16.0 15.0 13.9 12.6 11.3 9.8
20.0 26.5 25.5 24.5 23.5 22.4 21.2 20.0 18.7 17.3 15.8 14.1 12.2
25.0 33.1 31.9 30.6 29.3 28.0 26.5 25.0 23.4 21.7 19.8 17.7 15.3
32.0 42.3 40.8 39.2 37.5 35.8 33.9 32.0 29.9 27.7 25.3 22.6 19.6
40.0 52.9 51.0 49.0 46.9 44.7 42.4 40.0 37.4 34.6 31.6 28.3 24.5
50.0 66.1 63.7 61.2 58.6 55.9 53.0 50.0 46.8 43.3 39.5 35.4 30.6
63.0 83.3 80.3 77.2 73.9 70.4 66.8 63.0 58.9 54.6 49.8 44.5 38.6
11/68 ABB
Technical catalogue - Edition 2010
Tmax. T Generation
Low voltage moulded-case
circuit-breakers up to 1600 A
T GENERA
TMAX. COMPLETE FREEDOM.
Tmax is freedom. Freedom now reaching up to 1600 A And also a wide range of accessories and the possibility
with the new Tmax T7 circuit-breaker. There's a bound- of selecting dedicated ranges for all market applications,
less and highly diversified world of differing types of even the most specific and advanced ones.
installations, requirements, needs and problems from 0
to 1600 A. With T Generation everything becomes sim- BE FREE TO IN STALL ALL THE SIZES WITHOUT ANY
ple and rational – seven sizes to find the solutions you're D IFFICULTY.
looking for. T Generation is undeniably the family of moulded-case
circuit-breakers with the top performance/size ratio avail-
B E F REE TO S IZE A N Y TY PE O F I N STA L L ATI O N IN AN able on the market, so can you imagine how much more
I D E AL WAY AT AL L TI M E S. space there is for cabling and how simply you'll be able
Thanks to the seven sizes and a complete series of mag- to carry it out? And further, what about the reduced
netic only, thermomagnetic and electronic trip units. dimensions of the switchboard?
ATION
B E F REE TO RIDE TH E M O ST A D VA N C E D FREED OM OF TOTALLY SAFE SELECTION .

T E C HNOL OGY. The safety of knowing that behind Tmax there's ABB
It is thanks to this technology that T Generation offers SACE's strong and constant commitment to continually
you performances which were out of the question until search for excellence of quality at the base of each prod-
now in circuit-breakers with these dimensions. And there uct and service. ABB quality.
are some exclusive technical solutions which only ABB
SACE can offer you, such as the brand new electronic
trip units designed for the new Tmax T7 or the new
rapid accessory fitting system.
TMAX T1, T2 AND T3.
ALL SOLUTIONS PERFECTLY
COORDINATED, UP TO 250 A.
Tmax T1, T2 and T3 – the three “little ones” of the Tmax fam- current releases, designed and constructed to optimise space in
ily - were thought up from the beginning to work together. You the switchboard and simplify coupling with the circuit-breaker.
can select functions and performances which until now couldn't Tmax T1, T2 and T3 have a completely standardised range of
be found in circuit-breakers with these dimensions. Perfect up to accessories.
250 A.
There are so many characteristics common to the three sizes.
The single depth (70 mm) of the three pieces of apparatus mak-
ing installation truly simpler, the new arcing chambers produced
with a gasifying material, and an innovative construction system
allowing the arc extinction time to be reduced.
All three sizes are fitted with adjustment of the thermal threshold
as standard and have new - three-pole and four-pole - residual
T M AX T 1. T HE L ITTL E O N E TH AT'S R E A L LY B IG. dimensions. A breaking capacity of 85 kA at 415 V AC can be
Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions, Tmax T1 is a achieved. Tmax T2 can be fitted with a latest generation elec-
unique circuit-breaker in its category. Compared with any other tronic trip unit.
circuit-breaker with the same performance (160 A – up to 36 kA
at 415 V AC), the overall dimensions of the apparatus are nota- TM AX T3. 250 A IN A D EPTH OF 70 M M FOR T H E
bly smaller. FIRST TIM E.
Tmax T3 is the first circuit-breaker which carries 250 A in con-
T M AX T 2. INT EL L I G E N C E A N D H I G H PE R F O R M AN CE siderably limited overall dimensions compared with any other
I N THE PAL M OF YO UR H A N D. similar apparatus – a really large step forward for this type of
Tmax T2 is the only 160 A circuit- equipment.
breaker available with such high per- Tmax T3 allows coordinations for motor protection to be made
formances in such very limited overall up to a power of 90 kW at 415 V AC.
Overview of the Tmax family
Circuit-breakers for AC-DC distribution

T1 1p T1
Size [A] 160 160
1 In
Poles
[A]
[Nr]
16…160
1
16…160
3/4
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz 240 690
[V] (DC) 125 500
Icu (380-415 V AC) [kA] B 25* (220/230 V AC) 16
[kA] C 25
[kA] N 36
[kA] S
[kA] H
[kA] L
[kA] V
Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz
EFDP zone selectivity
ZS zone selectivity
Circuit-breakers for motor protection
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz
Magnetic only trip unit,
IEC 60947-2
PR221DS-I trip unit, IEC 60947-2
PR222MP trip unit, IEC 60947-4-1
PR231/P-I trip unit, IEC 60947-2
Circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Icu max [KA] 1000 V AC
[KA] 1150 V AC
[KA] 1000 V DC
4 poles in series
Switch-disconnectors
T1D
Ith [A] 160
Ie [A] 125
Poles [Nr] 3/4
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz 690
[V] (DC) 500
Icm [kA] 2.8
Icw [kA] 2
* For In 16 A and In 20 A: Icu @ 220/230 V AC = 16 kA
Note: ABB SACE’s moulded-case circuit-breakers are also available in the versions according to UL Standards
(see catalogue “ABB SACE molded case circuit-breakers - UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standard”).
1/2
1SDC210015D0205
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
160 250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
1.6…160
3/4
63…250
3/4
20…320
3/4
320…630
3/4
630...1000
3/4
200...1600
3/4
1
690 690 690 690 690 690
500 500 750 750 750
36 36 36 36 36
50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70
85 120 120 100 120
200 200 150
T4 T5 T6 T7
250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690/1000 690/1000 690 690
Q Q Q
Q
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
160 250 250/320 400/630 800 800/1000/1250
3 3 3 3 3 3
690 690 690 690 690 690
Q Q Q
Q Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
T4 T5 T6
250 400/630 630/800
3/4 3/4 3/4
20 20 12
12 12
40 40 40
T3D T4D T5D T6D T7D

250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
200 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690 690 690 690 690
500 750 750 750 750
5.3 5.3 11 30 52.2
3.6 3.6 6 15 20
1/3
1SDC210015D0205
General
Tmax family is now available as a complete range of moulded case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A.
All the circuit-breakers, both three-pole and four-pole, are available in the fixed version; the sizes T2,
T3, T4 and T5 in the plug-in version and T4, T5, T6 and T7 in the withdrawable one as well.
With the same frame size, the circuit-breakers in the Tmax family, are available with different breaking
capacities and different rated uninterrupted currents.
1 Rated uninterrupted
current [A]
1SDC210014F0001
1/4
1SDC210015D0205
The electric arc interruption system used on the Tmax circuit-breakers allows the short-circuit cur-
rents of very high value to be interrupted extremely rapidly. The considerable opening speed of the
contacts, the dynamic blasting action carried out by the magnetic field and the structure of the arcing
chamber contribute to extinguishing the arc in the shortest possible time, notably limiting the value
of the specific let-through energy I2t and the current peak.
Prospective
short-circuit
current
Limited
let-through
current
1SDC210015F0001
1/5
1SDC210015D0205
Construction characteristics
Modularity of the series
7
22
21
1
19
18
23 20
4
1
17
16
15 5
14
6
10
8 2
12
9
11
13
1/6
1SDC210015D0205
Distinguishing features of the series
Double insulation
Tmax has double insulation between the live power parts (excluding the terminals) and the front parts
of the apparatus where the operator works during normal operation of the installation. The seat of
each electrical accessory is completely segregated from the power circuit, thereby preventing any
risk of contact with live parts, and, in particular, the operating mechanism is completely insulated in
relation to the powered circuits.
Furthermore, the circuit-breaker has oversized insulation, both between the live internal parts and
in the area of the connection terminals. In fact, the distances exceed those required by the IEC
1SDC210A17F0001
Standards and comply with what is foreseen by the UL 489 Standard.

1
Positive operation
The operating lever always indicates the precise position of the moving contacts of the circuit-breaker,
thereby guaranteeing safe and reliable signals, in compliance with the prescriptions of the IEC 60073
and IEC 60417-2 Standard (I = Closed; O = Open; yellow-green line = Open due to protection trip).
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism has free release regardless of the pressure on the lever
and the speed of the operation. Protection tripping automatically opens the moving contacts: to
1SDC210A18F0001
close them again, the operating mechanism must be reset by pushing the operating lever from the
intermediate position into the lowest open position.
Isolation behaviour
In the open position, the circuit-breaker guarantees circuit in compliance with the IEC 60947-2
Standard. The oversized insulation distances guarantee there are no leakage currents and dielectric
resistance to any overvoltages between input and output.
1SDC210A19F0001
Degrees of protection
The table indicates the degrees of protection guaranteed by the Tmax circuit-breakers according to
the prescriptions of the IEC 60529 Standard:
With Without Without With high With low With IP40

front front (2) terminal terminal terminal protection kit
covers covers covers on the front
A IP 40(3) IP 20 - - - -
1SDC210A20F0001
B(4) IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
C - - - IP 40(1) IP 30(1) -
(1) (3)
After correct installation Also for front for lever operating mechanism and direct rotary handle
(2) (4)
During installation of the electrical accessories Only for T1...T6
The fixed parts are always preset with IP20 degree of protection. IP54 degree of protection can
be obtained with the circuit-breaker installed in a switchboard fitted with a rotary handle operating
mechanism transmitted on the compartment door and special kit (RHE – IP54).
1/8
1SDC210015D0205
Operating temperature
The Tmax circuit-breakers can be used in ambient conditions where the surrounding air temperature
varies between -25 °C and +70 °C, and stored in ambients with temperatures between -40 °C and
+70 °C.
The circuit-breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip units have their thermal element set for a refer-
ence temperature of +40 °C. For temperatures other than +40 °C, with the same setting, there is a
thermal trip threshold variation as shown in the table on page 4/50 and following.
The electronic trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature varies
but, in the case of temperatures exceeding +40 °C, the maximum setting for protection against
overloads L must be reduced, as indicated in the derating graph on page 4/37 and following, to take
into account the heating phenomena which occur in the copper parts of the circuit-breaker passed
1
through by the phase current.
For temperatures above +70 °C the circuit-breaker performances are not guaranteed. To ensure
service continuity of the installations, the way to keep the temperature within acceptable levels for
operation of the various devices and not only of the circuit-breakers must be carefully assessed, such
as using forced ventilation in the switchboards and in their installation room.
1SDC210A21F0001
Altitude
Up to an altitude of 2000 m the Tmax circuit-breakers do not undergo any alterations in their rated
performances. As the altitude increases, the atmospheric properties are altered in terms of composi-
tion, dielectric resistance, cooling capacity and pressure. Therefore the circuit-breaker performances
undergo derating, which can basically be measured by means of the variation in significant parameters
such as the maximum rated operating voltage and the rated uninterrupted current.
Altitude [m] 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rated service voltage, Ue [V~] 690 600 500 440
Rated uninterrupted current % 100 98 93 90
1/9
1SDC210015D0205
Distinguishing features of the series
Electromagnetic compatibility
Operation of the protections is guaranteed in the presence of interferences caused by electronic
apparatus, atmospheric disturbances or electrical discharges by using the electronic trip units and the
electronic residual current releases. No interference with other electronic apparatus near the place of
installation is generated either. This is in compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Appendix B + Appendix F
Standards and European Directive No. 89/336 regarding EMC - electromagnetic compatibility.
1
1SDC210A23F0001
Tropicalisation
Circuit-breakers and accessories in the Tmax series are tested in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-30
Standard, carrying out 2 cycles at 55 °C with the “variant 1” method (clause 7.3.3). The suitability of
the Tmax series for use under the most severe environmental conditions is therefore ensured with the
hot-humid climate defined in the climatograph 8 of the IEC 60721-2-1 Standards thanks to:
– moulded insulating cases made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fibres;
– anti-corrosion treatment of the main metallic parts;
– Fe/Zn 12 zinc-plating (ISO 2081) protected by a conversion layer, free from hexavalent-cromium
(ROHS-compliant), with the same corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520 class 2c;
– application of anti-condensation protection for electronic overcurrent releases and relative acces-
1SDC210A25F0001
sories.
Resistance to shocks and vibrations

The circuit-breakers are unaffected by vibrations generated mechanically and due to electromagnetic
effects, in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-6 Standards and the regulations of the major classifica-
tion organisations(1):
– RINA
– Det Norske Veritas
– Bureau Veritas
– Lloyd’s register of shipping
– Germanischer Lloyd
– ABS
– Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
The T1-T5 Tmax circuit-breakers are also tested, according to the IEC 60068-2-27 Standard, to
resist shocks up to 12g for 11 ms. Please ask ABB SACE for higher performances in terms of resist-
ance to shocks.
(1)
Ask to ABB for Tmax certificates of approval.
1/10
1SDC210015D0205
Versions and types
All the Tmax circuit breakers are available in fixed versions, T2, T3, T4 and T5 in the plug-in version
and T4, T5, T6(*) and T7 also in the withdrawable one.
All the circuit breakers can be manually operated, by the operating lever or the rotary handle (direct
or transmitted), and electrically operated. For this issue different solutions are available:
– The solenoid operator for T1, T2 and T3
– The stored energy motor operator for T4, T5 and T6
1SDC210A40F0001 – T7 with the stored energy operating mechanism, gear motor for the automatic charging of the
closing springs and shunt opening and closing releases.
1
1SDC210A41F0001
Installation
Tmax circuit-breakers can be installed in the switchboards, mounted in any horizontal, vertical or
lying down position on the back plate or on rails, without undergoing any derating of their rated
characteristics. Tmax circuit-breakers can be installed easily in all types of switchboards, above all
thanks to the possibility of being supplied either by top or bottom terminals, without jeopardizing
the apparatus functionality(**).
Apart from fixing on the base plate, T1, T2 and T3 can also be installed on DIN 50022 rails, thanks
to the special fixing brackets.
Furthermore, the depth of 70 mm takes Tmax T3 to the same standard as the two smaller sizes,
making assembly of circuit-breakers up to 250 A in standard switchboards even simpler. In fact, it is
possible to prepare standardised support structures, facilitating the design stage and construction
of the switchboard metalwork.
(*)
Not available on the 1000 A version.
(**)
For uses at a voltage of 1000 V, T4V250 and T5V400 in the fixed version, and T4L250 and T5L400 in the plug-in version must
be supplied from above.
1/11
1SDC210015D0205
Compliance with Standards and company quality system
Tmax circuit-breakers and their accessories comply with the international IEC 60947-2 Standards
and the EC directive:
– “Low Voltage Directives” (LVD) no. 2006/95/CE (replaces 72/23/EEC and subsequent amend-
ments)
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
Certification of compliance with the product Standards mentioned above is carried out, in accordance
with the European EN 45011 Standard, by the Italian certification organisation ACAE (Association
for Certification of Electrical Apparatus), member of the European organization LOVAG (Low Voltage
Agreement Group) and by the Swedish certification organization SEMKO.
The Test Room at ABB SACE is accredited by SINAL (certificate No. 062). The Tmax series
1
also has a range which has undergone certification according to the severe American UL 489
and CSA C22.2 Standards. Furthermore, the Tmax series is certified by the Russian GOST
1SDC210A37F0001
(Russia Certificate of Conformity) certification organisation. The pieces of apparatus comply

with the prescriptions for on-board shipping installations and are approved by the major Naval
Registers - Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd, Bureau Veritas, Rina, Det Norske
Veritas, Russian Maritime Register of Shipping, and ABS (please ask ABB SACE for confirmation
about the versions available).
ABB SACE’s Quality System complies with the international ISO 9001-2000 Standard (model for
quality assurance in design, development, construction, installation and service assistance) and with
the equivalent European EN ISO 9001 and Italian UNI EN ISO 9001 Standards.
The third certifying Organisation is RINA-QUACER. ABB SACE received the first certification in 1990
with three-year validity and this has now reached its fifth confirmation.
The new Tmax series has a hologram on the front, obtained using special anti-imitation techniques - a
guarantee of the quality and genuineness of the circuit-breaker as an ABB SACE product. Attention
to protection of the environment is another priority commitment for ABB SACE, and, as confirmation
of this, the environmental management system has been certified by RINA. ABB SACE - the first
industry in the electromechanical sector in Italy to obtain this recognition - thanks to a revision of
the production process with an eye to ecology - has been able to reduce the consumption of raw
materials and waste from processing by 20%. ABB SACE’s commitment to safeguarding the environ-
ment is also shown in a concrete way by Life Cycle Assessments (LCA) of the products, carried out
directly by ABB SACE’s Research and Development in collaboration with the ABB Research Centre.
Selection of materials, processes and packing materials is made optimising the true environmental
impact of the product, also foreseeing the possibility of its being recycled.
Furthermore, in 1997 ABB SACE developed its Environmental Management system and got it certified
in conformity with the international ISO14001 Standard, integrating it in 1999 with the Management
System for Health and Safety in the workplace according to OHSAS 18001 (Swedish National Test-
ing and Research Institute).
1/13
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers for power distribution
Electrical characteristics
Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Tmax T2

Rated uninterrupted current [A] 160 160 160
Poles [No.] 1 3/4 3/4
Rated service voltage, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 240 690 690
(DC) [V] 125 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 500 800 800
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 3000 3000
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu B B C N N S H L
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 25* 25 40 50 65 85 100 120
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 10 15 22 30 45 55 75
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 8 10 15 25 30 36 50
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 3 4 6 6 7 8 10
(DC) 250 V - 2 poles in series [kA] 25 (at 125 V) 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
(DC) 250 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 20 30 40 40 55 85 100
(DC) 500 V - 2 poles in series [kA] – – – – – – – –
(DC) 500 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
2 (DC) 750 V - 3 poles in series

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V
[kA]
[%Icu]
–
75%
–
100%
–
75% 75%
– –
100%
–
100%
–
100% 100%
–
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [%Icu] – 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 75% (70 kA)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 52.5 52.5 84 105 143 187 220 264
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [kA] – 32 52.5 75.6 75.6 105 154 187
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 17 30 46.2 63 94.5 121 165
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 13.6 17 30 52.5 63 75.6 105
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 4.3 5.9 9.2 9.2 11.9 13.6 17
Opening time (415 V) [ms] 7 7 6 5 3 3 3 3
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2) A A A
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Isolation behaviour Q Q Q
Trip units: thermomagnetic
T fixed, M fixed TMF Q – –
T adjustable, M fixed TMD – Q Q
T adjustable, M adjustable (5…10 x In) TMA – – –
T adjustable, M fixed (3 x In) TMG – – Q(8)
T adjustable, M adjustable (2.5…5 x In) TMG – – –
magnetic only MA – – Q(MF up to In 12.5 A)
electronic PR221DS – – Q
PR221GP/PR221MP – – Q
PR222DS – – –
PR223DS – – –
PR231/P – – –
PR232/P – – –
PR331/P – – –
PR332/P – – –
Interchangeability – – –
Versions F F F-P
Terminals fixed FC Cu FC Cu-EF-FC CuAl-HR F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R
plug-in – – F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R
withdrawable – – –
Fixing on DIN rail – DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000 25000 25000
[No. Hourly operations] 240 240 240
Electrical life @ 415 V AC [No. operations] 8000 8000 8000
[No. Hourly operations] 120 120 120
Basic dimensions - fixed version 3 poles W [mm] 25.4 (1 pole) 76 90
4 poles W [mm] – 102 120
D [mm] 70 70 70
H [mm] 130 130 130
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 0.4 (1 pole) 0.9/1.2 1.1/1.5
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] – – 1.5/1.9
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] – – –
TERMINAL CAPTION FC Cu = Front for copper cables VR = Rear flat vertical P = plug-in circuit-breakers
F = Front FC CuAl = Front for copper-aluminium cables HR/VR = Rear flat orientated W = withdrawable circuit-breakers
(*)
EF = Front extended R = Rear orientated MC = Multicable The breaking capacity for settings In = 16 A
ES = Front extended spread HR = Rear flat horizontal F = fixed circuit-breakers and In = 20 A is 16 kA
2/4
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7
250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690 690 690 690 690
500 750 750 750 –
8 8 8 8 8
800 1000 1000 1000 1000
3000 3500 3500 3500 3500
N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L S H L V(6)
50 85 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 85 100 200 200
36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150
25 40 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80 50 65 100 130
20 30 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65 40 50 85 100
5 8 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30 30 42 50 60
36 50 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 – – – –
40 55 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 65 – – – –
36 50 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
75% 50%
– 16 25 36 50
100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

70 16
100%
25 36 50
100% 100% 100% 100%

70 16
100%
20
100%
36
100%
50
75%
–
100%
–
100%
–
100%
–
100%
2
75% 50% (27 kA) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 75% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100%(2) 75% 75% 75% 75% 100% 75% 75% 75%
105 187 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 187 220 440 440
75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 220 105 154 264 330
52.5 84 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94.5 105 176 105 143 220 286
40 63 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 73.5 105 143 84 105 187 220
7.7 13.6 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 46 52.5 63 63 88.2 105 132
7 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7 15 10 8 8
A A B (400 A)(3) - A (630 A) B (630A - 800A)(5) - A (1000A) B(7)
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Q Q Q Q Q
– – – – –
Q Q (up to 50 A) – – –
– Q (up to 250 A) Q (up to 500 A) Q (up to 800 A)(4) –
Q – – – –
– – Q (up to 500 A) – –
Q Q – – –
– Q Q Q –
– – – – –
– Q Q Q –
– Q Q Q –
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– Q Q Q Q
F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W(4) F-W
F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-MC F-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-RC F-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-RC F-EF-ES-FC CuAl-HR/VR
F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl – –
– EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-HR-VR EF-HR/VR-RS-ES
DIN EN 50022 – – – –
25000 20000 20000 20000 10000
240 240 120 120 60
8000 8000 (250 A) - 6000 (320 A) 7000 (400 A) - 5000 (630 A) 7000 (630A) - 5000 (800A) - 4000 (1000A) 2000 (S, H, L versions) / 3000 (V version)
120 120 60 60 60
105 105 140 210 210
140 140 186 280 280
70 103.5 103.5 103.5 154 (manual) /178 (motorizable)
150 205 205 268 268
1.5/2 2.35/3.05 3.25/4.15 9.5/12 9.7/12.5 (manual) - 11/14 (motorizable)
2.7/3.7 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 – –
– 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12.1/15.1 29.7/39.6 (manual) - 32/42.6(motorizable)
(1) (5)
75% for T5 630 Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) - 10 kA (800 A) Notes: In the plug-in version of T2, T3 and T5
(2) (6)
50% for T5 630 Only for T7 800/1000/1250 A 630 and in the withdrawable version
(3) (7)
Icw = 5 kA Icw = 20 kA (S,H,L versions) - 15 kA (V version) of T5 630 the maximum rated current
(4) (8)
W version is not available on T6 1000 A For availability, please ask ABB SACE available is derated by 10% at 40 °C
2/5
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Service releases
The Tmax family of circuit-breakers can be fitted with service releases (shunt opening release, shunt
closing release and undervoltage release). These are available in the pre-cabled version, depending
on the size of the circuit-breaker fitted with 1 m long free cables, with a connector with 1 m cables
or with a simple pin connector and two terminals to be mounted in the terminal board, or in the
uncabled version, with cabling to be carried out by the customer.
Assembly is carried out for all the releases by pressing into the special seat in the left part of the
circuit-breaker (right for T7) and fixing with the screw provided.
The releases are always alternative to each other for T1, T2, T3 (both for the three-pole and four-pole
version), whereas for T4, T5 and T6 in the four-pole version the shunt opening release (not possible
with PS-SOR) and the undervoltage release can be housed at the same time, as long as they are
in the wired version and with the shunt opening release necessarily mounted in the slot of the third
pole. T4, T5, T6 circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version can be equipped only with pre-cabled
accessories; the T4-T5-T6 circuit-breakers complete with motorized controls can only be fitted with
prewired undervoltage and shunt opening releases.
The T7 circuit-breaker allows simultaneous mounting of all three service releases. These two pos-
sibilities are available on the three-pole version as well. Moreover Tmax T7 can be equipped with two
shunt opening releases instead of the undervoltage release to facilitate some specific applications
where a very high safety level of the remote circuit-breaker opening command is required.
Shunt opening release – SOR

Allows circuit-breaker opening by means of an electric command. Operation of the release is guar-
anteed for a voltage between 70% and 110% of the rated power supply voltage value Un, both in
alternating current and in direct current. For Tmax T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6, the SOR shunt opening
release is fitted with a limit contact for cutting off the power supply in the open position and with the
1SDC210C52F0001
release tripped.
3
T1-T2-T3
1SDC210C53F0001
1SDC210C54F0001
1SDC210C55F0001
T4-T5-T6
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6
SOR - Electrical characteristics

1SDC210D18F0001
Inrush power consumption

Tmax T1, T2, T3 Tmax T4, T5, T6 Tmax T7
Version AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W]
T7 12 V DC 50 150
24 V AC/DC 300 300
24…30 V AC/DC 50 50 150 150
30 V AC/DC 300 300
48 V AC/DC 300 300
48…60 V AC/DC 60 60 150 150
60 V AC/DC 300 300
110…120 V AC/DC 300 300
120…127 V AC/DC 300 300
110…127 V AC - 110…125 V DC 50 50 150 150
220…240 V AC/DC 300 300
220…240 V AC - 220…250 V DC 50 50 150 150
240…250 V AC/DC 300 300
380…400 V AC 300
380…440 V AC 55 150
415…440 V AC 300
480…525 V AC 55 150
Opening times [ms] 15 15 15 15 50 50
3/16
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Electrical signals
These allow information on the operating state of the circuit-breaker to be taken outside.
Installation of these accessories is carried out directly from the front of the circuit-breaker in special
slots placed on the right-hand side of the circuit-breaker, completely segregated from the live parts
- all to the benefit of user safety. The auxiliary contacts can be supplied (depending on the type)
either in the version with cabling to be carried out by the customer by means of connection to the
terminals integrated in the auxiliary contacts, or with cabling directly on the circuit-breaker terminal
board or in the pre-cabled version, depending on the size of the circuit-breaker fitted with free ca-
bles 1 m long, with a connector with 1 m long cables. The pre-cabled version is mandatory on the
T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version. The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always
fitted with three terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling. The auxiliary
contacts are available for use both in direct and alternating current at various voltages. The signals
are reset when the circuit-breaker is reset.
T1-T7 (AUX)
Available both in the pre-cabled and uncabled version, they supply the following electrical signalling:
– open/closed: indicates the position of the circuit-breaker contacts (Q)
– release trip: signals circuit-breaker opening due to overcurrent release trip (for overload or short circuit),
trip of the residual current release, of the opening coil or of the undervoltage release, of the emergency
opening pushbutton of the motor operator or two to operation of the test pushbutton (SY)
– contact for signalling electronic trip unit tripped: signals intervention of one of the protection func-
tions of the electronic trip unit (S51).
1SDC210C62F0001
The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with terminals to be mounted in the terminal box to carry
out wiring.
T4, T5, T6 and T7 with electronic trip units (AUX-SA)

AUX - 250 V AC/DC
3 There is a contact for signalling electronic trip units tripped, only available in the pre-cabled version for use at
250 V AC.
T4, T5 and T6 (AUX-MO)

This auxiliary contact, only in the cabled version, must necessarily be combined with the motor
operator and indicates the motor operation mode (manual or remote).
1SDC210C63F0001
T7 (AUX-RTC)
The “circuit-breaker ready to close” auxiliary contact is available with wiring directly on the terminal
box of the T7 circuit-breaker with stored energy operating mechanism and signals that the circuit-
breaker is ready to accept a closing command if there are the following five conditions:
AUX-C - 250 V AC/DC
– circuit-breaker open
– closing springs charged
– any opening coil de-energised
– any undervoltage coil energised
1SDC210D19F0001
– opening solenoid armed.
T7 (AUX-SC)
Indicates the state of the circuit-breaker operating mechanism closing springs remotely (supplied
T7
only with the spring charging motor).
T4, T5 and T6 with PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF electronic trip unit (AUX-E)
Only available in the pre-cabled version, the auxiliary contacts AUX-E (also called electronic version
contacts) communicate the state of the circuit-breaker to the electronic trip unit and make an open/
closed signal available to the outside and another one for electronic trip unit tripped.
They can only be combined with the PR222DS/PD or PR223DS electronic trip unit and only function
when there is a 24 V DC auxiliary power supply to the trip unit for the communication functions.
The AUX-E contacts can, moreover, be directly connected to the MOE-E motor operator (see page
3/26).
The “traditional” version of the auxiliary contacts can also be combined with the protection trip units
with dialogue; in this case, only electrical signalling of the state of the circuit-breaker will be provided
and it will not be possible to communicate remotely or control the motor.
3/20
1SDC210015D0205
1SDC210C64F0001
1SDC210C64F0001
AUX AUX-C
AUX - Electrical characteristics

AUX 250 V - T1...T6
Power supply voltage Service current
Category of utilisation (IEC 60947-5-1)
AC 14 DC 13
125 V 6A 0.3 A
250 V 5A 0.15 A
Protection with gG 10x38
type fuse (Imax 6 A)
AUX 400 V - T4...T7 3

Power supply voltage Service current In [A]
AC DC
125 V – 0.3
250 V 12(1) 0.15
400 V 3 –
(1)
5 A for Tmax T7
AUX 24 V - T1...T7
Power supply voltage Service current In [A]
AC DC
24 V – 0.75 mA
5V – 1 mA
AUX-E - T4...T6
Typical contact Mosfet
Vmax 48 V DC/30 V AC
Rmax 35 ohm
Pmax (resistive load) 200 mW
System contact/earth insulation 2000 V AC (1 min. @ 50 Hz)
Contact/contact insulation 400 V DC
Table of the possible combinations of the T7-T7M auxiliary contacts
T7 SY Q1 1Q + 1SY T7M Q2 Q3 2Q
Q2 Q3 2Q Q4 Q1 2Q
SY Q1 Q2 Q3 3Q + 1SY Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 4Q
3/21
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Electrical signals
Types of auxiliary contacts

Version T1 T2 TMD T2 PR221 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled/

1 release tripped changeover contact not cabled Q Q Q Q Q Q
AUX 250 V AC/DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled/
AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 SA electronic release trip contact + pre-cabled
1 open/closed changeover contact +
1 release tripped changeover contact Q
AUX 250 V AC/DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled
AUX 400 V AC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled
1 release tripped changeover contact Q Q Q Q
AUX 400 V AC 2 open/closed changeover contacts pre-cabled Q Q Q Q
AUX 24 V DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled
AUX 24 V DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts pre-cabled Q
AUX 24 V DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled/
AUX-SA 250 V AC 1 SA electronic release trip contact pre-cabled Q Q Q Q
AUX-MO 1 contact signalling manual/remote not cabled Q Q Q
AUX-RTC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre-cabled Q
AUX-RTC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre-cabled Q
AUX-SC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre-cabled Q
AUX-SC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre-cabled Q
3 AUX-E 1 open/closed contact +

1 relay tripped contact
(only with PR222DS/PD and PR223DS)
pre-cabled
Q Q Q
Testing extension for auxiliary contacts

Available for Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers, this allows the auxiliary contacts to be connected
1SDC210C60F0001
to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit-breaker in the removed position. With the circuit-
breaker in a safe position, i.e. isolated in relation to the power circuits, it is possible to carry out blank
function tests of the circuit- breaker.
1SDC210C65F0001
3/22
1SDC210015D0205
IP54 protection for rotary handle
Allows IP54 degree of protection to be obtained.
It is available for the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door (RHE)
for all the Tmax circuit-breakers.
1SDC210C80F0001
Front for lever operating mechanism – FLD

This can be installed on fixed, plug-in or withdrawable Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers. In the
case of withdrawable circuit-breakers, installed in a switchboard, it allows the IP40 degree of protec-
tion to be maintained for the whole isolation run of the circuit-breaker.
It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position (6 mm Ø stem up to three padlocks - not supplied)
which prevents closing of the circuit-breaker and of the compartment door, and with compartment
1SDC210C81F0001
door lock. On request, it can be fitted with a key lock in the open position.
It is available in the following versions:
– for fixed or plug-in circuit-breaker
– for withdrawable circuit-breaker.
The front for lever operating mechanism is always an alternative to the motor operator and to the
rotary handle and to the display FDU.
The same flange for the compartment door already supplied with the circuit-breaker or the one sup-
plied with the conversion kit for withdrawable version can be used.
3
Padlock for operating lever – PLL

1SDC210C82F0001
This is applied to the T1 - T2 - T3 circuit-breaker cover to prevent the lever closing or opening op-
eration. It allows installation up to a maximum of three padlocks - 7 mm Ø stem (not supplied). It is
available in the following versions:
– plug-in locking device only of the closing operation
– locking plate on the closing and opening operation according to the assembly position. The lock
on the opening operation does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote
control command
– locking plate just for the closing operation.
It is incompatible with the front accessories: solenoid operator, rotary handle operating mechanism
and mechanic interlock.
The padlock is also available for T7 and it is directly mounted on the circuit-breaker cover.
1SDC210C83F0001
T1-T3
1SDC210C84F0001
T1-T3
3/31
1SDC210015D0205
Trip curves for power distribution
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip units
T2 160 – TMD T2 160 – TMD

In = 125 A In = 160 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
10-1 10-1
I3 = 10 x In I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E07F0001
1SDC210E07F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
T2 160 – TMG T3 250 – TMD

4 In = 63÷250 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
In = 16 A I3 = 160 A
In = 25 A I3 = 160 A
In = 40 A I3 = 200 A
10-1 In = 63 A I3 = 200 A 10-1
In = 80...160 A I3 = 3 x In
I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E08F0001
1SDC210E09F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
4/4
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
400-440 V 400-440 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 1
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
10-1 25A-32A
20A
16A
12,5A
1 10-2
160A
10A
125A
8A
100A
6,3A
80A
10-3 5A
40A÷63A
4A
32A
20A-25A
16A
10-1 10-4
3,2A
2,5A
2A
10-5 1,6A
1A
1SDC210E43F0001
1SDC210E44F0001
10-2 10-6
1 10 102 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
400-440 V 400-440 V 4
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10
250A
200A
160A
125A
1 1
100A
100A-320A
80A 80A
63A 32A-50A
20A-25A
10A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E45F0001
1SDC210E46F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/21
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
400-440 V 400-440 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
16A
10 12,5A
102
10A
8A
6,3A
5A
1
4A
3,2A
160A
125A 2,5A
100A 2A
10
80A 1,6A
40A÷63A 1A
10-1
32A
20A-25A
16A
1SDC210E69F0001
1SDC210E70F0001
1 10-2
1 10 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
400-440 V 400-440 V 4
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
100A-320A
102
80A
32A-50A
20A-25A
250A 10
200A 10A
160A
125A
100A
10
80A
63A
1SDC210E71F0001
1SDC210E72F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/31
1SDC210015D0205
Temperature performances
Circuit-breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units
and switch-disconnectors
T2 160 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
F 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
EF 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
ES 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
FC Cu 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
FC CuAl 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
R 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
F = Front flat terminals EF = Front extended terminals ES = Front extended spread terminals
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables R = Rear terminals
Note: in the plug-in version the maxi-
mum setting is derated by 10%
at 40 °C.
1SDC210E90F0001
T2 160 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
4 Plug-in F
Imax [A]
144
I1
0.9
Imax [A]
138
I1
0.84
Imax [A]
126
I1
0.80
Imax [A]
112
I1
0.68
EF 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
ES 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
FC Cu 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
FC CuAl 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
R 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
F = Front flat terminals EF = Front extended terminals ES = Front extended spread terminals
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables R = Rear terminals
Note: in the plug-in version the maxi-
mum setting is derated by 10%
at 40 °C.
1SDC210F62F0001
4/40
1SDC210015D0205
Temperature performances
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip units
Tmax T1 and T1 1P(1)

10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
16 13 18 12 18 12 17 11 16 11 15 10 14 9 13
20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 18 11 16
25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 20 28 18 26
40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 38 25 35 23 33
50 40 58 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 31 44 28 41
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 39 55 36 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 53 75 49 70 46 65
100 81 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 66 94 61 88 57 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 131 88 125 82 117 77 109 71 102
160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 105 150 98 140 91 130
(*) For the T1 1p circuit-breaker (fitted with TMF fixed thermomagnetic trip unit), only consider the column corresponding to the
maximum adjustment of the TMD trip units.
Tmax T2
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
1.6 1.3 1.8 1.2 1.8 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6 1 1.5 1 1.4 0.9 1.3
2 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.5 2.1 1.4 2 1.3 1.9 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6
2.5 2 2.9 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6 1.8 2.5 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.4 2
3.2 2.6 3.7 2.5 3.5 2.4 3.4 2.2 3.2 2.1 3 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6
4 3.2 4.6 3.1 4.4 2.9 4.2 2.8 4 2.6 3.7 2.4 3.5 2.3 3.2
5 4 5.7 3.9 5.5 3.7 5.3 3.5 5 3.3 4.7 3 4.3 2.8 4
6.3 5.1 7.2 4.9 6.9 4.6 6.6 4.4 6.3 4.1 5.9 3.8 5.5 3.6 5.1
8 6.4 9.2 6.2 8.8 5.9 8.4 5.6 8 5.2 7.5 4.9 7 4.5 6.5
10 8 11.5 7.7 11 7.4 10.5 7 10 6.5 9.3 6.1 8.7 5.6 8.1
12.5
16
10.1
13
14.4
18
9.6
12
13.8
18
9.2
12
13.2
17
8.8
11
12.5
16
8.2
10
11.7
15
7.6
10
10.9
14
7.1
9
10.1
13 4
20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 17 11 16
25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 19 28 18 26
40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 37 24 35 23 32
50 40 57 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 30 43 28 40
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 36 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 49 70 45 65
100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 117 76 109 71 101
160 (1) 129 184 123 178 118 168 112 160 105 150 97 139 90 129
(1)
For CB in plug-in version further 10% derating.
Tmax T3
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 35 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 48 69 45 64
100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 80
125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 116 76 108 70 100
160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 104 149 97 139 90 129
200 161 230 154 220 147 211 140 200 130 186 121 173 112 161
250 201 287 193 278 184 263 175 250 163 233 152 216 141 201
(1)
For CB in plug-in version further 10% derating.
4/57
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Power distribution circuit-breakers
T3 250 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles - Front terminals (F)

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
63 630 051241 051263
80 800 051242 051264
100 1000 051243 051265
1SDC210304F0004
125 1250 051244 051266

160 1600 051245 051267
200 2000 051246 051268
250 2500 051247 051269
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit for
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
generator protection - TMG
63 400 055105 055119
80 400 055106 055120
100 400 055107 055121
125 400 055108 055122
160 480 055109 055123
200 600 055110 055124
250 750 055111 055125
T3 250 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles - Front terminals (F)

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
63 630 051252 051274
80 800 051253 051275
100 1000 051254 051276
N=50% 125 1250 051255 051277
N=50% 160 1600 051256 051278
N=50% 200 2000 051257 051279
N=50% 250 2500 051258 051280
N=100% 125 1250 051303 051307
N=100% 160 1600 051304 051308
N=100% 200 2000 051305 051309
N=100% 250 2500 051306 051310
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit for
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
generator protection - TMG
63 400 055112 055126
80 400 055113 055127
100 400 055114 055128
125 400 055115 055129
160 480 055116 055130
200 600 055117 055131
250 750 055118 055132
7
see “Abbreviation caption” page 7/2
7/10
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Service releases
Shunt opening release - SOR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7-T7M
uncabled version
1SDC210204F0004
SOR 12 V DC 053000 054862

SOR 24 V AC / DC 062065
SOR 24...30 V AC / DC 051333 054863
SOR 30 V AC / DC 062066
T4 - T5 - T6
SOR 48 V AC / DC 062067
SOR 48...60 V AC / DC 051334 054864
SOR 60 V AC / DC 062068
SOR 110…120 V AC / DC 062069
SOR 110...127 V AC - 110...125 V DC 051335 054865
SOR 120…127 V AC / DC 063547
1SDC210N75F0001
SOR 220…240 V AC / DC 063548

SOR 220...240 V AC - 220...250 V DC 051336 054866
SOR 240…250 V AC / DC 062070
T7 SOR 380…400 V AC 062071
SOR 380...440 V AC 051337 054867
SOR 415…440 V AC 062072
SOR 480...525 V AC 051338 054868
cabled version(1)
SOR-C 12 V DC 053001 054869
SOR-C 24...30 V AC / DC 051339 054870
SOR-C 48...60 V AC / DC 051340 054871
SOR-C 110...127 V AC - 110...125 V DC 051341 054872
SOR-C 220...240 V AC - 220...250 V DC 051342 054873
SOR-C 380...440 V AC 051343 054874
SOR-C 480...525 V AC 051344 054875
Note: For T7-T7M in withdrawable version, sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary. See page 3/4 and 7/43.
(1)
Compulsory with T4-T5-T6 in the withdrawable or motorized versions.
SOR Test Unit

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M 050228
1SDC210P07F0001
Shunt closing release - SCR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
1SDC210N75F0001
cabled version
SCR 24 V AC / DC 062076
SCR 30 V AC / DC 062077
SCR 48 V AC / DC 062078
SCR 60 V AC / DC 062079
SCR 110...120 V AC / DC 062080
SCR 120...127 V AC / DC 063549
SCR 220...240 V AC / DC 063550
SCR 240...250 V AC / DC 062081
SCR 380...400 V AC
SCR 415...440 V AC
062082
062083 7
7/45
1SDC210015D0205
Time delay device for undervoltage release - UVD
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1…T6 T7-T7M
UVD 24…30 V AC / DC 051357 038316
UVD 48 V AC / DC 038317
UVD 48…60 V AC / DC 051358
1SDC210147F0004
UVD 60 V AC / DC 038318
UVD 110...125 V AC / DC 051360 038319
UVD 220...250 V AC / DC 051361 038320
Electrical signals
Auxiliary contacts - AUX

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7 T7M
uncabled version(1)
AUX 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051368 051368
AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051369 051369
AUX 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 062104
AUX 2Q 400 V AC 062102 062102
AUX 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 068797 062103
1SDC210205F0004
1SDC210148F0004
AUX 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 054914 054914

AUX 2Q 24 V DC 062101 062101
cabled version(1) with 1 m long
cables
T1 - T2 - T3 AUX-C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051370 054910
AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051371 054911
AUX-C 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 054912
AUX-C 2Q 400 V AC 054913
1SDC210N76F0001
AUX-C 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 066075

AUX-C 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 055361 054915
cabled version for T2 with
PR221 DS trip unit
T7
AUX-C 1 S51 1Q SY 053704
AUX-C 2Q 1SY 055504
cabled contact for signalling
trip coil release trip
AUX-SA 1 S51 T4-T5 NO 055050
AUX-SA 1 S51 T4-T5 NC 064518
AUX-SA 1 S51 T6(2) 060393
AUX-SA 1 S51 T7-T7M 24 V 066099 066100
AUX-SA 1 S51 T7-T7M 250 V 062105 063553
cabled contact for signalling
manual/remote operation
AUX-MO-C(3) 054917
cabled contact circuit breaker
ready to close
AUX-RTC 24 V DC 062108
AUX-RTC 250 V AC/DC 062109
cabled contact signalling
spring charged
AUX-MC 24 V DC 062106
AUX-MC 250 V AC/DC 062107
cabled contacts in electronic
version
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY T4-T5(4) 054916
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY T6(4) 064161
(1)
(2)
These cannot be combined with T2 circuit-breaker fitted with PR221DS electronic trip unit.
7
Available only mounted on the circuit-breaker.
(3)
For T4, T5 and T6 in plug-in/withdrawable version, it is necessary to order a socket plug connector 3 poles 1SDA051364R1
(4)
Only with circuit-breakers equipped with PR222DS/PD and PR223DS trip units.
7/47
1SDC210015D0205
Operating mechanism and locks
Padlock lever lock - PLL

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T7 T7M
1SDC210167F0004
PLL - plug-in in open position 051393

PLL for T1 1p - plug-in in open position 060199
PLL - plate in open/closed position 051394
PLL - plate in open position 060534
PLL - padlock in open position 062150 062151
Note: On T7, the padlock is an alternative to the key lock
1SDC210N83F0004
“Ronis” key lock in open position on the circuit-breaker - KLC (1)

1SDC210163F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
standard version
KLC same key - T1 053528
version with key removable in both positions
KLC-S same key - T1 051395
(1)
It cannot be mounted when there is a front operationg mechanism, a rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator or RC221/RC222 residual
current device and, only in the case of three pole circuit-breakers, with the service releases (UVR, SOR).
Key lock in open position on the circuit-breaker - KLC

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7 T7M
1SDC210N84F0004
KLC-D - different key 062134 062141

KLC-S - same key for different groups of circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 062135 062142
KLC-R - arrangement for Ronis key lock 062139 062146
KLC-P - arrangement for Profalux key lock 062140 062146
Key lock for rotary handle - RHL

1SDC210162F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
RHL - different keys for each circuit-breaker/in open position 051389
RHL - same key for different groups of circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 051390
RHL - different keys for each circuit-breaker/in open-closed position 052021
7
7/51
1SDC210015D0205
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS &
CORE BALANCE CTs
DESCRIPTION RCD-V10 DC
A range of fixed and variable Earth Leakage Relays in compact 35mm din rail mounting cases for use on 3 phase
electrical systems.
APPLICATION
To monitor earth leakage current and to operate an associated relay at a preset current. May be used to shut down
a system or operate an alarm under fault conditions.
MODEL ADJUSTABLE SENSITIVITY CURRENT TIME DELAY SETTING

RCD-V3 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3A 0, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5sec
RCD-V10 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10A 0, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5sec
0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1A
RCD-V30 0 - 0.5sec
x 1, 10, 100, 300
All models are fitted with test and reset buttons. Pressing the test button allows a fault to be simulated and the output
relays operate accordingly. Pressing the reset button after a fault occurs restores the unit back to its normal operation.
A red LED light will illuminate after the unit trips due to an excessive fault current.
SPECIFICATIONS Cert. No.: AJA04/7898 Cert. No.: AJA(S)04/Q1375
Supply Voltage (Un): 220/240V AC 50/60Hz ( ± 10% ) Output: 2xSPDT Relays

24V DC 50/60Hz ( ± 10% ) AC1 250V AC 8A ( 2000W )
AC15 250V AC 2.5A
Residual Voltage: 500V AC max. DC1 25V DC 8A ( 200W )
Supply Variation: 90 - 110% Un Fault Level Output: 10W max. @ Un
Power Consumption: 5VA Standard: Testing compliance with International

Standard:
Toroid Withstand: 50kA for 200ms CISPR 11:2004
IEC 61000-6-4:2006 (Ed. 2.0)
Ambient Temperature: -5 to +60oC IEC 61000-6-2:2005
Relative Humidity: +95% Certified By: Testing & Certification Australia

Report No: 46838.1
Housing: UL94VO Flame Retardant
N.B.
Weight: 200g For RCD-V10, 120/210mm toroids should not be used for sensitivity
settings of less than 300mA.
Mounting: 35mm Dil Rail For all other models 120/210mm toroids should not be used for
sensitivity settings of 30mA & 100mA.
Terminal Conductor: ≤ 2.5mm2 stranded RCD-V3, RCD-V10 are fifted with a green LED light indicating
≤ 4mm2 solid energisastion.
Our policy is one of continuous development and therefore specifications may change without notice Asta Electrical (S) Pte Ltd
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS &
CORE BALANCE CTs
DIMENSIONS ( mm ) CONNECTION DIAGRAM
N L
85
rese
test
45 ZCT
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
67
2 44 66 8 10 12 14
48
36
second standard
Width = 70 output output
Core balance CTs should preferably be connected to the Earth Leakage Relays using a screen or shielded cable.
The distance between the relay and the transformer should be kept as short as possible. For cabling distances
that exceed 1 metre connect the screen ( at the unit end ) to terminal 11.
CORE BALANCE CTs
DESCRIPTION
A range of moulded case core balance CTs available
with various internal diameters, also referred to as
zero phase CTs. The products are compact in design
and supplied complete with inbuilt mounting feet.
APPLICATION
Specifically designed for use with the HOBUT range
of Earth Leakage Relays. Specification of tripping
current is not required as this is set automatically
by the relay.
RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
Part No. Internal Diameter Conforms to: IEC44-1, IEC185 & BS7676
CTB 35 35mm Rated System Voltage: 720V AC
CTB 70 70mm Insulation Level: 3kV AC
CTB 120 120mm Frequency Range: 50-60Hz
CTB 210* 210mm Terminals: combination screws, wire protected
2
* Ring type tape wrapped toroid Terminal Conductor: ≤2.5mm wire
Our policy is one of continuous development and therefore specifications may change without notice.
HOWARD BUTLER MANUFACTURING PTE LTD

NO.2 WOODLANDS SECTOR 1
#05-35 WOODLANDS SPECTRUM 1
SINGAPORE 738068
Tel: 65 6555 1289 Fax: 65 6555 1291
Email: hobut@asta.com.sg Web: www.asta.com.sg
Ù»²»®¿´ó°«®°±-» Î»´¿§
ÙîÎó@óÍ ÝÍÓÁÙîÎó_óÍÁÜÍÁÛÁíÁï
Í´·³ ¿²¼ Í°¿½»ó-¿ª·²¹ Ð±©»® Ð´«¹ó·² Î»´¿§

Ô±½µ¿¾´» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ³±¼»´- ²±© ¿ª¿·´¿¾´»ò
Þ«·´¬ó·² ³»½¸¿²·½¿´ ±°»®¿¬·±² ·²¼·½¿¬±®ò
Ð®±ª·¼»¼ ©·¬¸ ²¿³»°´¿¬»ò
ßÝ ¬§°» ·- »¯«·°°»¼ ©·¬¸ ¿ ½±·´ó¼·-½±²²»½¬·±² -»´ºó¼·¿¹²±-¬·½
º«²½¬·±² øÔÛÜ ¬§°»÷ò
Ø·¹¸ -©·¬½¸·²¹ °±©»® øïó°±´»æ ïð ß÷ò
Û²ª·®±²³»²¬óº®·»²¼´§ øÝ¼ô Ð¾ º®»»÷ò
É·¼» ®¿²¹» ±º Í±½µ»¬- ¿´-± ¿ª¿·´¿¾´»ò
ÔÎ
Ó±¼»´ Ò«³¾»® Í¬®«½¬«®»
Ó±¼»´ Ò«³¾»® Ô»¹»²¼
ÙîÎ ó ó ó
ï î í ì ë ê é
ïò Î»´¿§ Ú«²½¬·±² ëò Ì»®³·²¿´-
Þ´¿²µæ Ù»²»®¿´ó°«®°±-» Íæ Ð´«¹ó·²
îò Ò«³¾»® ±º Ð±´»- êò Ý´¿--·º·½¿¬·±²
ïæ ï °±´» Þ´¿²µæ Ù»²»®¿´ó°«®°±-»
îæ î °±´»- Òæ ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±®
íò Ý±²¬¿½¬ Ú±®³ Üæ Ü·±¼»
Þ´¿²µæ ÍÐÜÌ ÒÜæ ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ¿²¼ ¼·±¼»
ìò Ý±²¬¿½¬ Ì§°» Ò×æ ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ©·¬¸ ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±²
Þ´¿²µæ Í·²¹´» ÒÜ×æ ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ¿²¼ ¼·±¼» ©·¬¸ ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±²
éò Î¿¬»¼ Ý±·´ Ê±´¬¿¹»
Ñ®¼»®·²¹ ×²º±®³¿¬·±²
Ô·-¬ ±º Ó±¼»´-
Û²½´±-«®» Ý±²¬¿½¬ º±®³
Ý´¿--·º·½¿¬·±² Ý±·´ ®¿¬·²¹-
®¿¬·²¹ ÍÐÜÌ ÜÐÜÌ
Ù»²»®¿´ó°«®°±-» ÙîÎóïóÍ ÙîÎóîóÍ
ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ßÝñÜÝ ÙîÎóïóÍÒ ÙîÎóîóÍÒ
ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ©·¬¸ ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ÙîÎóïóÍÒ× øÍ÷ ÙîÎóîóÍÒ× øÍ÷
Ð´«¹ó·² ¬»®³·²¿´ Ë²-»¿´»¼
Ü·±¼» ÙîÎóïóÍÜ ÙîÎóîóÍÜ
ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ¿²¼ ¼·±¼» ÜÝ ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜ ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜ
ÔÛÜ ·²¼·½¿¬±® ¿²¼ ¼·±¼» ©·¬¸ ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜ× øÍ÷ ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜ× øÍ÷
Ò±¬»æ É¸»² ±®¼»®·²¹ô ¿¼¼ ¬¸» ®¿¬»¼ ½±·´ ª±´¬¿¹» ¿²¼ þøÍ÷þ ¬± ¬¸» ³±¼»´ ²«³¾»®ò Î¿¬»¼ ½±·´ ª±´¬¿¹»- ¿®» ¹·ª»² ·² ¬¸» ½±·´ ®¿¬·²¹- ¬¿¾´»ò
Û¨¿³°´»æ ÙîÎóïóÍ ïî ÊÜÝ øÍ÷ Ò»© ³±¼»´
Î¿¬»¼ ½±·´ ª±´¬¿¹»
ï
ÙîÎó@óÍ
ß½½»--±®·»- øÑ®¼»® Í»°¿®¿¬»´§÷

Ý±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬-
Ì®¿½µñ-«®º¿½»ó³±«²¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬ Þ¿½µó³±«²¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬
ß°°´·½¿¾´» Î»´¿§ ³±¼»´
Í½®»©´»-- ½´¿³° ¬»®³·²¿´ Í½®»© ¬»®³·²¿´ Ì»®³·²¿´- Ó±¼»´
ÐîÎÚóðëÍ øÍ»» ²±¬»ò÷ ÐÝÞ ¬»®³·²¿´- ÐîÎóðëÐô ÐîÎóðëéÐ
ï °±´» ÐîÎÚóðëóÛ
õ
ÙîÎóïóÍøÒ÷øÜ÷øÒÜ÷øÒ×÷øÒÜ×÷ ÐîÎÚóðë Í±´¼»® ¬»®³·²¿´- ÐîÎóðëß
øÐîÝÓóÍ ø±°¬·±²÷÷
ÐîÎÚóðèÍ øÍ»» ²±¬»ò÷ ÐÝÞ ¬»®³·²¿´- ÐîÎóðèÐô ÐîÎóðèéÐ
î °±´»- ÐîÎÚóðèóÛ
õ
ÙîÎóîóÍøÒ÷øÜ÷øÒÜ÷øÒ×÷øÒÜ×÷ ÐîÎÚóðè Í±´¼»® ¬»®³·²¿´- ÐîÎóðèß
øÐîÝÓóÍ ø±°¬·±²÷÷
Ò±¬»æ Ë-» ±º ¬¸» ÐîÝÓ Ý´·° ú Î»´»¿-» Ô»ª»® ·- ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ ¬± »²-«®» -¬¿¾´» ³±«²¬·²¹ò
ß½½»--±®·»- º±® Í½®»©´»-- Ý´¿³° Ì»®³·²¿´ Í±½µ»¬ øÑ°¬·±²÷

Ò¿³» Ó±¼»´
Ý´·° ú Î»´»¿-» Ô»ª»® ÐîÝÓóÍ
Ò¿³»°´¿¬» Îççóïï Ò¿³»°´¿¬» º±® ÓÇ
Í±½µ»¬ Þ®·¼¹» ÐîÎÓóÍÎ øº±® ßÝ÷ô ÐîÎÓóÍÞ øº±® ÜÝ÷
Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ì®¿½µ-
ß°°´·½¿¾´» Í±½µ»¬ Ü»-½®·°¬·±² Ó±¼»´
ëð ½³ ø´÷ ¨ éòí ³³ ø¬÷æ ÐÚÐóëðÒ
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¬®¿½µ ï ³ ø´÷ ¨ éòí ³³ ø¬÷æ ÐÚÐóïððÒ
Ì®¿½µó½±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬ ï ³ ø´÷ ¨ ïê ³³ ø¬÷æ ÐÚÐóïððÒî
Û²¼ °´¿¬» ÐÚÐóÓ
Í°¿½»® ÐÚÐóÍ
Þ¿½µó½±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ °´¿¬» ÐîÎóÐö
ö Ë-»¼ ¬± ³±«²¬ -»ª»®¿´ ÐîÎóðëß ¿²¼ ÐîÎóðèß Ý±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬- -·¼» ¾§ -·¼»ò
Í°»½·º·½¿¬·±²-
Ý±·´ Î¿¬·²¹-
Ó«-¬ Ó«-¬
Ý±·´ ·²¼«½¬¿²½» øØ÷ Ó¿¨ò
Î¿¬»¼ ½«®®»²¬ö ±°»®¿¬» ®»´»¿-» Ð±©»®
Ý±·´ ø®»ºò ª¿´«»÷ ª±´¬¿¹»
Î¿¬»¼ ª±´¬¿¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ½±²-«³°¬·±²
®»-·-¬¿²½»ö
ß®³¿¬«®» ß®³¿¬«®» ø¿°°®±¨ò÷
ëð Ø¦ êð Ø¦ û ±º ®¿¬»¼ ª±´¬¿¹»
ÑÚÚ ÑÒ
îì Ê ìíòë ³ß íéòì ³ß îëí ðòèï ïòëë
ïïð Ê çòë ³ß èòî ³ß ëôëêê ïíòíí îêòèí
ßÝ ïîð Ê èòê ³ß éòë ³ß éôîèê ïêòïí íîòìê èðû ³¿¨ò íðû ³¿¨ò ïïðû ðòç Êß ¿¬ êð Ø¦
îíð Ê ìòì ³ß íòè ³ß îéôïéî éîòêè ïìíòçð
îìð Ê íòé ³ß íòî ³ß íðôíêð çðòëè ïèîòíì
Ó«-¬ Ó«-¬
Ý±·´ ·²¼«½¬¿²½» øØ÷ Ó¿¨ò
±°»®¿¬» ®»´»¿-» Ð±©»®
Ý±·´ ø®»ºò ª¿´«»÷ ª±´¬¿¹»
Î¿¬»¼ ª±´¬¿¹» Î¿¬»¼ ½«®®»²¬ö ª±´¬¿¹» ª±´¬¿¹» ½±²-«³°¬·±²
®»-·-¬¿²½»ö
ß®³¿¬«®» ß®³¿¬«®» ø¿°°®±¨ò÷
û ±º ®¿¬»¼ ª±´¬¿¹»
ÑÚÚ ÑÒ
êÊ èéòð ³ß êç ðòîë ðòìè
ïî Ê ìíòî ³ß îéè ðòçè îòíë
ÜÝ éðû ³¿¨ò ïëû ³·²ò ïïðû ðòëí É
îì Ê îïòê ³ß ïôïïí íòêð èòîë
ìè Ê ïïòì ³ß ìôîîð ïëòî îçòèî
ö Ì¸» ®¿¬»¼ ½«®®»²¬ ¿²¼ ½±·´ ®»-·-¬¿²½» ¿®» ³»¿-«®»¼ ¿¬ ¿ ½±·´ ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ±º îípÝ ©·¬¸ ¬±´»®¿²½»- ±º oïðûò
î
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Ý±²¬¿½¬ Î¿¬·²¹-
Ò«³¾»® ±º °±´»- ï °±´» î °±´»-
Î»-·-¬·ª» ´±¿¼ ×²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼ Î»-·-¬·ª» ´±¿¼ ×²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
Ô±¿¼
ø½±- ã ï÷ ø½±- ã ðòìå ÔñÎ ã é ³-÷ ø½±- ã ï÷ ø½±- ã ðòìå ÔñÎ ã é ³-÷
ïð ß ¿¬ îëð ÊßÝå éòë ß ¿¬ îëð ÊßÝå ë ß ¿¬ îëð ÊßÝå î ß ¿¬ îëð ÊßÝå í ß ¿¬
Î¿¬»¼ ´±¿¼
ïð ß ¿¬ íð ÊÜÝ ë ß ¿¬ íð ÊÜÝ ë ß ¿¬ íð ÊÜÝ íð ÊÜÝ
Î¿¬»¼ ½¿®®§ ½«®®»²¬ ïð ß ëß
Ó¿¨ò -©·¬½¸·²¹ ª±´¬¿¹» ììð ÊßÝô ïîë ÊÜÝ íèð ÊßÝô ïîë ÊÜÝ
Ó¿¨ò -©·¬½¸·²¹ ½«®®»²¬ ïð ß ëß
îôëðð Êßô ïôèéë Êßô ïôîëð Êßô ëðð Êßô
Ó¿¨ò -©·¬½¸·²¹ °±©»®
íðð É ïëð É ïëð É çð É
Ú¿·´«®» ®¿¬» ø®»º»®»²½» ª¿´«»÷ ïðð ³ß ¿¬ ë ÊÜÝ ïð ³ß ¿¬ ë ÊÜÝ
Ò±¬»æ Ð ´»ª»´æ êð ã ðòï ¨ ïðóêñ±°»®¿¬·±²
Ý¸¿®¿½¬»®·-¬·½-
×¬»³ ï °±´» î °±´»-
Ý±²¬¿½¬ ®»-·-¬¿²½» ïðð ³ ³¿¨ò
Ñ°»®¿¬» ø-»¬÷ ¬·³» ïë ³- ³¿¨ò
ßÝæ ïð ³- ³¿¨òå ÜÝæ ë ³- ³¿¨ò ßÝæ ïë ³- ³¿¨òå ÜÝæ ïð ³- ³¿¨ò
Î»´»¿-» ø®»-»¬÷ ¬·³»
ø©ñ¾«·´¬ó·² ¼·±¼»æ îð ³- ³¿¨ò÷ ø©ñ¾«·´¬ó·² ¼·±¼»æ îð ³- ³¿¨ò÷
Ó¿¨ò ±°»®¿¬·²¹ Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´æ ïèôððð ±°»®¿¬·±²-ñ¸®
º®»¯«»²½§ Û´»½¬®·½¿´æ ïôèðð ±°»®¿¬·±²-ñ¸® ø«²¼»® ®¿¬»¼ ´±¿¼÷
×²-«´¿¬·±² ®»-·-¬¿²½» ïôððð Ó ³·²ò ø¿¬ ëðð ÊÜÝ÷
ëôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·² ¾»¬©»»² ½±·´ ¿²¼
ëôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·² ¾»¬©»»² ½±·´ ¿²¼ ½±²¬¿½¬-öå
½±²¬¿½¬-öå
Ü·»´»½¬®·½ -¬®»²¹¬¸ íôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·² ¾»¬©»»² ½±²¬¿½¬- ±º ¼·ºº»®»²¬ °±´¿®·¬§
ïôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·² ¾»¬©»»² ½±²¬¿½¬- ±º
ïôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·² ¾»¬©»»² ½±²¬¿½¬- ±º -¿³» °±´¿®·¬§
-¿³» °±´¿®·¬§
Ü»-¬®«½¬·±²æ ïð ¬± ëë ¬± ïð Ø¦ô ðòéë ³³ -·²¹´» ¿³°´·¬«¼» øïòë ³³ ¼±«¾´» ¿³°´·¬«¼»÷
Ê·¾®¿¬·±² ®»-·-¬¿²½»
Ó¿´º«²½¬·±²æ ïð ¬± ëë ¬± ïð Ø¦ô ðòéë ³³ -·²¹´» ¿³°´·¬«¼» øïòë ³³ ¼±«¾´» ¿³°´·¬«¼»÷
Ü»-¬®«½¬·±²æ ïôððð ³ñ-î
Í¸±½µ ®»-·-¬¿²½»
Ó¿´º«²½¬·±²æ îðð ³ñ-î ©¸»² »²»®¹·¦»¼å ïðð ³ñ-î ©¸»² ²±¬ »²»®¹·¦»¼
Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´æ ßÝ ½±·´æ ïðôðððôððð ±°»®¿¬·±²- ³·²òå
Û²¼«®¿²½» ÜÝ ½±·´æ îðôðððôððð ±°»®¿¬·±²- ³·²ò ø¿¬ ïèôððð ±°»®¿¬·±²-ñ¸®÷
Û´»½¬®·½¿´æ ïððôððð ±°»®¿¬·±²- ³·²ò ø¿¬ ïôèðð ±°»®¿¬·±²-ñ¸® «²¼»® ®¿¬»¼ ´±¿¼÷ øÜÝ ½±·´ ¬§°»÷
ß³¾·»²¬ ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹æ
ìðpÝ ¬± éðpÝ ø©·¬¸ ²± ·½·²¹ ±® ½±²¼»²-¿¬·±²÷
ß³¾·»²¬ ¸«³·¼·¬§ Ñ°»®¿¬·²¹æ ëû ¬± èëû
É»·¹¸¬ ß°°®±¨ò îï ¹
Ò±¬»æ Ê¿´«»- ·² ¬¸» ¿¾±ª» ¬¿¾´» ¿®» ¬¸» ·²·¬·¿´ ª¿´«»-ò
öìôððð ÊßÝô ëðñêð Ø¦ º±® ï ³·²«¬» ©¸»² ¬¸» ÐîÎóðëß ±® ÐîÎóðèß Í±½µ»¬ ·- ³±«²¬»¼ò
ß°°®±ª»¼ Í¬¿²¼¿®¼-
ËÔ ëðè øÚ·´» Ò±ò Ûìïêìí÷ ×ÛÝñÊÜÛ øÛÒêïèïð÷
Ý±²¬¿½¬ Ñ°»®ó Ý±²¬¿½¬
Ó±¼»´ Ý±·´ ®¿¬·²¹- Ý±²¬¿½¬ ®¿¬·²¹- Ý±·´ ®¿¬·²¹- Ý±²¬¿½¬ ®¿¬·²¹- Ñ°»®¿¬·±²-
º±®³ ¿¬·±²- º±®³
ïð ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷ êô ïîô îìô ìè ÊÜÝ ë ßô ììð ÊßÝ ø½±- ã ïòð÷
ÙîÎóïóÍ ÍÐÜÌ ïð ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷ ê ¨ ïðí ï °±´» îìô ïïðô ïîðô îíðô ïð ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø½±- ã ïòð÷ ïðð ¨ ïðí
ë ¬± ïïð ÊÜÝ ÌÊóí øÒÑ ½±²¬¿½¬ ±²´§÷ îìð ÊßÝ ïð ßô íð ÊÜÝ øð ³-÷
ë ¬± îìð ÊßÝ ë ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷ êô ïîô îìô ìè ÊÜÝ
ë ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø½±- ãïòð÷
ÙîÎóîóÍ ÜÐÜÌ ë ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷ ê ¨ ïðí î °±´»- îìô ïïðô ïîðô îíðô ïðð ¨ ïðí
ë ßô íð ÊÜÝ øð ³-÷
ÌÊóí øÒÑ ½±²¬¿½¬ ±²´§÷ îìð ÊßÝ
ÝÍß îîòî Ò±òðô Ò±òïì ÔÎ

øÚ·´» Ò±ò ÔÎíïçîè÷ Ò«³¾»®
Ý±·´ ®¿¬·²¹- Ý±²¬¿½¬ ®¿¬·²¹- Ñ°»®¿¬·±²-
±º °±´»-
Ý±²¬¿½¬ Ñ°»®ó
Ó±¼»´ Ý±·´ ®¿¬·²¹- Ý±²¬¿½¬ ®¿¬·²¹- ïð ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷
º±®³ ¿¬·±²-
ë ¬± ïïð ÊÜÝ éòë ßô îëð ÊßÝ øÐÚðòì÷
ïð ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷ ï °±´» ïðð ¨ ïðí
ë ¬± îìð ÊÜÝ ïð ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷
ÙîÎóïóÍ ÍÐÜÌ ïð ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷ ê ¨ ïðí
ëßô íðÊÜÝ øÔñÎãé³-÷
ë ¬± ïïð ÊÜÝ ÌÊóí øÒÑ ½±²¬¿½¬ ±²´§÷
ë ¬± îìð ÊßÝ ë ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷
ë ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷
ë ¬± ïïð ÊÜÝ î ßô îëð ÊßÝ øÐÚðòì÷
ÙîÎóîóÍ ÜÐÜÌ ë ßô îëð ÊßÝ ø¹»²»®¿´ «-»÷ ê ¨ ïðí î °±´»- ïðð ¨ ïðí
ë ¬± îìð ÊÜÝ ë ßô íð ÊÜÝ ø®»-·-¬·ª»÷
ÌÊóí øÒÑ ½±²¬¿½¬ ±²´§÷
íßô íðÊÜÝ øÔñÎãé³-÷
í
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Û²¹·²»»®·²¹ Ü¿¬¿
Ó¿¨·³«³ Í©·¬½¸·²¹ Ð±©»®
Ð´«¹ó·² Î»´¿§-
ÙîÎóïóÍ ÙîÎóîóÍ
ïðð ïðð
ßÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼ ßÝ ®»-·-¬·ª»

ø½±- ã ðòì÷ ´±¿¼
ßÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ø½±- ã ðòì÷ ßÝ ®»-·-¬·ª»
ïð ïð ´±¿¼
ÜÝ ®»-·-¬·ª»
´±¿¼
ÜÝ ®»-·-¬·ª»
´±¿¼
ÜÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ï øÔñÎ ã é ³-÷ ï ÜÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
øÔñÎ ã é ³-÷
ðòï
ï ïð ïðð ïððð ðòï
ï ïð ïðð ïððð
Í©·¬½¸·²¹ ª±´¬¿¹» øÊ÷ Í©·¬½¸·²¹ ª±´¬¿¹» øÊ÷
Û²¼«®¿²½»
Ð´«¹ó·² Î»´¿§-
ÙîÎóïóÍ ÙîÎóîóÍ
ëôððð ïðôððð
ëôððð
îëðóÊßÝñíðóÊÜÝ
ïôððð ®»-·-¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ïôððð
ëðð îëðóÊßÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ø½±- ã ðòì÷ íðóÊÜÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼ øÔñÎ ã é³-÷
ëðð
îëðóÊßÝñíðóÊÜÝ
®»-·-¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ïðð ïðð
íðóÊÜÝ ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼ øÔñÎ ã é³-÷ îëðóÊßÝ
ëð
ëð ·²¼«½¬·ª» ´±¿¼
ø½±- ã ðòì÷
Í©·¬½¸·²¹ ½«®®»²¬ øß÷ Í©·¬½¸·²¹ ½«®®»²¬ øß÷
ß³¾·»²¬ Ì»³°»®¿¬«®» ª- Ó¿¨·³«³ Ý±·´ Ê±´¬¿¹»
ÜÝ ½±·´
ßÝ ½±·´
Ò±¬»æ Ì¸» ³¿¨·³«³ ª±´¬¿¹» ®»º»®- ¬± ¬¸» ³¿¨·³«³

ª¿´«» ·² ¿ ª¿®§·²¹ ®¿²¹» ±º ±°»®¿¬·²¹ °±©»®
ª±´¬¿¹»ô ²±¬ ¿ ½±²¬·²«±«- ª±´¬¿¹»ò
ß³¾·»²¬ ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» øpÝ÷
ì
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Ü·³»²-·±²-
Ò±¬»æ ß´´ «²·¬- ¿®» ·² ³·´´·³»¬»®- «²´»-- ±¬¸»®©·-» ·²¼·½¿¬»¼ò
Î»´¿§- ©·¬¸ Ð´«¹ó·² Ì»®³·²¿´-
ÍÐÜÌ Î»´¿§-
ÙîÎóïóÍô ÙîÎóïóÍÒô ÙîÎóïóÍÒ× øÍ÷ Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ñ×²¬»®²¿´ Ý±²²»½¬·±²-
ÙîÎóïóÍÜô ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜô ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜ× øÍ÷ øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
ÙîÎóïóÍ ÙîÎóïóÍÜ øÜÝ÷
îç ³¿¨ò ï ï
ïí ³¿¨ò
ë î ì í ë î ì í
ÙîÎóïóÍÒô ÙîÎóïóÍÒ× øßÝ÷ ÙîÎóïóÍÒô ÙîÎóïóÍÒ× øÜÝ÷
ï ï
ðòë ìòéë ë î ì í ë î ì í
ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜô ÙîÎóïóÍÒÜ× øÜÝ÷

ëòî ëòî
ïéòë
ï
ë î ì í
ÜÐÜÌ Î»´¿§-
ÙîÎóîóÍô ÙîÎóîóÍÒô ÙîÎóîóÍÒ× øÍ÷ Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ñ×²¬»®²¿´ Ý±²²»½¬·±²-
ÙîÎóîóÍÜô ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜô ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜ× øÍ÷ øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
ÙîÎóîóÍ ÙîÎóîóÍÜ øÜÝ÷
ï î í ì
îç ³¿¨ò ïí ³¿¨ò ï î í ì
è é ê ë
è é ê ë
ÙîÎóîóÍÒô ÙîÎóîóÍÒ× øßÝ÷ ÙîÎóîóÍÒô ÙîÎóîóÍÒ× øÜÝ÷
ï î í ì ï î í ì
ðòë îòë
è é ê ë è é ê ë
îòì
ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜô ÙîÎóîóÍÒÜ× øÜÝ÷

ë ë
ïçòì ï î í ì
è é ê ë
ë
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Ì®¿½µñÍ«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬-

ÐîÎÚóðëóÍ íèòî ³¿¨ò
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬
íêòë ³¿¨ò øÌ±° Ê·»©÷
ïï
íîòê ïì
îéòê
ïî
îîòê
ßï ßî
Í¬¿²¼¿®¼ ³±¼»´ Ñ°¬·±² ø©·¬¸ »¶»½¬±® ¿²¼

´¿¾»´ ¿¬¬¿½¸»¼÷
îèòë øëòí÷
ïèòð ³¿¨ò íîòê
íèòî ³¿¨ò Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬

ÐîÎÚóðèóÍ íêòë ³¿¨ò
øÌ±° Ê·»©÷
îï ïï
íîòê îì ïì
îéòê
îî ïî
îîòê øíòì÷
ßï ßî
Í¬¿²¼¿®¼ ³±¼»´ Ñ°¬·±² ø©·¬¸ »¶»½¬±®

¿²¼ ´¿¾»´ ¿¬¬¿½¸»¼÷
îèòê øëòí÷
ïèòð ³¿¨ò íîòê
ß½½»--±®·»- º±® ÐîÎÚó@óÍ

Í±½µ»¬ Þ®·¼¹» Ý´·° ¿²¼ Î»´»¿-» Ô»ª»®
×²-«´¿¬·²¹ ½±¿¬·²¹
ïì
ç
Ô
ïòî ¼·¿ò ½±²¼«½¬±® øÍ»» ²±¬» ïò÷ ïêòè ìðòíë
ê
ÙîÎó@óÍ
ÐîÎÚóðëóÛ Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-

î øÌ±° Ê·»©÷ øº±® Í«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹÷
Ú·ª»ô ÓíòëIé ìè ³¿¨ò
íòîó¼·¿ò
ì øïï÷ ¸±´»
î
íçòë øïì÷
í øïî÷
èëòë ³¿¨ò íëòë íçòëoðòï
íòëó¼·¿ò
¸±´»
Óí ±®
ë
íòëó¼·¿ò
øßï÷ ï ¸±´»
øßî÷
ïïòë
ïêòð ³¿¨ò êï ³¿¨ò
Ò±¬»æ Ð·² ²«³¾»®- ·² °¿®»²¬¸»-»- ¿°°´§ ¬± Ü×Ò -¬¿²¼¿®¼ò
ÐîÎÚóðèóÛ
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
øÌ±° Ê·»©÷ øº±® Í«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹÷
î
î ïòë Û·¹¸¬ô ÓíIè ìèòð ³¿¨ò í
øîï÷ ê í øïï÷ íòîó¼·¿ò
øîî÷ é î øïî÷ ¸±´»
íçòë øîì÷ ë ì øïì÷
íëòë
èëòë íçòëoðòï
³¿¨ò
íòëó¼·¿ò ¸±´» è
øßï÷ Óí ±®
íòëó¼·¿ò
ï
øßî÷ ¸±´»
ë ïïòë
êïòð
³¿¨ò
ïêòð ³¿¨ò
ÐîÎÚóðë î
é Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
Ú·ª»ô Óíòë ¨ è øÌ±° Ê·»©÷ øº±® Í«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹÷
ìó¼·¿ò ¸±´»- ìòîó¼·¿ò ¸±´»
éïòë ³¿¨ò íëòë
íðoðòðë
ì ïçòë
íð ³¿¨ò Óí ±® íòîó¼·¿ò
ïçòë ³¿¨ò
¸±´»
ëì ³¿¨ò
ÐîÎÚóðè
î
é
Û·¹¸¬ô Óíòë ¨ è Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
ìó¼·¿ò ¸±´»- øÌ±° Ê·»©÷ øº±® Í«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹÷
ìòîó¼·¿ò ¸±´»
éïòë ³¿¨ò íëòë
íðoðòðë
ïçòë
ì
ïçòë ³¿¨ò íð ³¿¨ò Óí ±® íòîó¼·¿ò
ëì ³¿¨ò ¸±´»
é
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø»·¹¸¬ ±º Î»´¿§ ©·¬¸ Ì®¿½µñÍ«®º¿½» Ó±«²¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬-

ÐîÎÚóà ÐîÎÚóàóÛ
êêòë êîòð
êéòð éðòë
ÐîÎÚóàóÍ
éîòð
êëòð
îèòê
øëòíð÷
Þ¿½µó½±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬-
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
ÐîÎóðëÐ øïó°±´»÷ ïìòë ³¿¨ò øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷ Ì±´»®¿²½»æ oðòï
ï ì é
ì
Ú·ª»ô
ê ïòêó¼·¿ò
ìòë ¸±´»-
ê
ïë íëòë ³¿¨ò
ïòî ìòë
ì ïë
íòë
ïòë ì
øë÷
é ì
é
íêòë ³¿¨ò
ÐîÎóðèÐ øîó°±´»÷
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
ì ïìòë ³¿¨ò
é øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
ðòí
éòë Û·¹¸¬ô ïòíó¼·¿ò ¸±´»-
ë
ë
íëòë ³¿¨ò ë
îð
ï ë
îòè îð
ïòë
øìòí÷
éòë
Ì»®³·²¿´ °´¿¬» ¬¸·½µ²»--æ ðòí íêòë ³¿¨ò
è
ÙîÎó@óÍ
ë
ÐîÎóðëß øïó°±´»÷ é
ïìòë ³¿¨ò
ïòî
ðòí
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬
êòé øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
íòè
ïêòé ë íëòë ³¿¨ò
Ð¿²»´ Ý«¬±«¬
Ú·ª»ô í ¨ ïòèó¼·¿ò ¸±´»-
ïíòêoðòï
ê
Ì»®³·²¿´ °´¿¬» ¬¸·½µ²»--æ ðòí íêòë ³¿¨ò
íðòëoðòî
ÐîÎóðèß øîó°±´»÷ é é ïìòë ³¿¨ò
ïòî
ðòí
ë
ë
íëòë ³¿¨ò Î»½±³³»²¼»¼ ¬¸·½µ²»-- ±º
îð
îòê ¬¸» °¿²»´ ·- ïòê ¬± îòð ³³
îòè
ïòë
Û·¹¸¬ô í ¨ ïòîó¼·¿ò ¸±´»-
éòë
Ì»®³·²¿´ °´¿¬» ¬¸·½µ²»--æ ðòí íêòë ³¿¨ò
ÐîÎóðëéÐ ïì ³¿¨ò ïêòì Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-

èòé øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
ðòé ï ïðòì ìoðòï Ú·ª»ô
ïòêó¼·¿ò
¸±´»-
êoðòï
íé ³¿¨òîçòê
ìòëoðòï ïëoðòï
èòé ìoðòï
éòì
ë
éoðòï
ìï ³¿¨ò
ÐîÎóðèéÐ ïì ³¿¨ò
ïêòì
Ì»®³·²¿´ ß®®¿²¹»³»²¬ Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø±´»-
éòë ï øÞ±¬¬±³ Ê·»©÷
ïðòì Û·¹¸¬ô
éòë ïòíó¼·¿ò
¸±´»-
íé ³¿¨ò îçòï ë
ë
îð
èòç éòì
øèòï÷
ìï ³¿¨ò
Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ø»·¹¸¬ ±º Î»´¿§ ©·¬¸ Þ¿½µó½±²²»½¬·²¹ Í±½µ»¬-

ÙîÎóàÐ ÙîÎóàß ÙîÎóàéÐ
ÙîÎ Î»´¿§
ÙîÎ Î»´¿§
ììòë ìéòë
ÐîÎóÁÐ íèòð
Í±½µ»¬ ÐîÎóÁß
Í±½µ»¬
ç
ÙîÎó@óÍ
Ó±«²¬·²¹ Ì®¿½µ-
ÐÚÐóïððÒô ÐÚÐóëðÒ ÐÚÐóïððÒî
ïê
éòíoðòïë
ìòë
ìòë
íëoðòí îéoðòïë íëoðòí îé îì îçòî
ïë îë îë îë îë ïë îë îë îë îë ïë ï ïòë
ïë øë÷ ï ïð ïð
ïð ïð
ïôððð øëðð÷ ïôððð
×¬ ·- ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ ¬± «-» ¿ °¿²»´ ïòê ¬± îòð ³³ ¬¸·½µò
Û²¼ Ð´¿¬» Í°¿½»®

ïê
ÐÚÐóÓ ïð
ÐÚÐóÍ ë ïî
êòî
ïòè
ï
ëð íëòë íëòí íìòè
ïòè ììòí
ïïòë ïòí
ïð
Óì ¨ è °¿² ìòè
ïêòë
¸»¿¼ -½®»©
Ð®»½¿«¬·±²-
Ý¿¬·±²
Ü± ²±¬ «-» ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² º±® ¿²§ °«®°±-» ±¬¸»® ¬¸¿² ¬»-¬·²¹ò Þ» Ð®»½¿«¬·±²- º±® ÐîÎÚó@óÍ Ý±²²»½¬·±²
-«®» ²±¬ ¬± ¬±«½¸ ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ¿½½·¼»²¬¿´´§ ¿- ¬¸·- ©·´´ ¬«®² ¬¸»
Ü± ²±¬ ³±ª» ¬¸» -½®»©¼®·ª»® «°ô ¼±©²ô ±® º®±³ -·¼» ¬± -·¼» ©¸·´» ·¬
½±²¬¿½¬- ÑÒò Þ»º±®» «-·²¹ ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±²ô ½±²º·®³ ¬¸¿¬ ½·®½«·¬-ô ¬¸»
·- ·²-»®¬»¼ ·² ¬¸» ¸±´»ò Ü±·²¹ -± ³¿§ ½¿«-» ¼¿³¿¹» ¬± ·²¬»®²¿´
´±¿¼ô ¿²¼ ¿²§ ±¬¸»® ½±²²»½¬»¼ ·¬»³ ©·´´ ±°»®¿¬» -¿º»´§ò
½±³°±²»²¬- ø»ò¹òô ¼»º±®³¿¬·±² ±º ¬¸» ½´¿³° -°®·²¹ ±® ½®¿½µ- ·² ¬¸»
Ý¸»½µ ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ·- ®»´»¿-»¼ ¾»º±®» ¬«®²·²¹ ÑÒ ®»´¿§ ½·®ó
¸±«-·²¹÷ ±® ½¿«-» ¼»¬»®·±®¿¬·±² ±º ·²-«´¿¬·±²ò
½«·¬-ò
Ü± ²±¬ ·²-»®¬ ¬¸» -½®»©¼®·ª»® ¿¬ ¿² ¿²¹´»ò Ü±·²¹ -± ³¿§ ¾®»¿µ ¬¸»
×º ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±² ·- °«´´»¼ ±«¬ ¬±± º±®½»º«´´§ô ·¬ ³¿§ ¾§°¿-- ¬¸» ³±ó
-·¼» ±º ¬¸» -±½µ»¬ ¿²¼ ®»-«´¬ ·² ¿ -¸±®¬ó½·®½«·¬ò
³»²¬¿®§ ¬»-¬·²¹ °±-·¬·±² ¿²¼ ¹± -¬®¿·¹¸¬ ·²¬± ¬¸» ´±½µ»¼ °±-·¬·±²ò
Ë-» ¿² ·²-«´¿¬»¼ ¬±±´ ©¸»² §±« ±°»®¿¬» ¬¸» ¬»-¬ ¾«¬¬±²ò
ïð
Read and Understand This Catalog
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or
comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified)
from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR

FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS
IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS
OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT
SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's
application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the
products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product,
machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible
uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:
· Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this catalog.
· Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles,
safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
· Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE
SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made.
However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or
establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual
specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the
result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical,
typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
2009.7
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
http://www.ia.omron.com/
(c)Copyright OMRON Corporation 2009 All Right Reserved.
HWS Series
AC-DC Switching Power Supply HWS・HWS/ME・HWS/HD・HWS-P
HWS Series
WIDE SELECTION OF LINE UP RANGE FROM

GENERAL INDUSTRIAL, MEDICAL, HEAVY DUTY
TO POWER SUPPLY WITH PEAK OUTPUT
HWS Series put together the concept of User-friendly

"Environment-friendly", "User-friendly", and
● Miniature package
"Safety" as its foundation to offer wide range
● Unified style
of product.
● Extensive product line
Environmental-friendly
HWS Safety
● High reliability design
● Green power line
● Safety-oriented design
● Complies with RoHS Directive
● Safe to operate
● Energy Saving
HWS Series Line Up

・HWS General industrial
・HWS/ME Medical standard (IEC60601) compliance
・HWS/HD Suitable for harsh environment/Heavy duty equipment
・HWS-P Peak power load
■ HWS Series Model Name

HWS ＊＊＊ - ＊＊＊＊
Option code
Output voltage
Output power
● Output power
In addition to 11 models for 15W ∼ 1800W, there are 2 models
for peak power models which bring the total of 13 models.
● Output voltage
Wide variety of line up from 3.3V to 48V. 60V is also available for 1000W and above models.
● Option code
Code Contents
ME EN/UL60601 Approved, low leakage current for medical application
HD Double-sided coating and -40℃start up, suitable for harsh environment
A Cover for additional safety operation
R Remote ON/OFF by external voltage
ADIN DIN Reel type
PV External voltage adjustment
FG Low leakage current type
＊Not all models are available for above option and longer delivery might be needed for option models. Please contact our sales for more information
2
HWS Series
HWS AC/DC Switching Power Supply Line up

P7
Environment-friendly 90
85
Efficiency (%)
HWS150
Previous 80
Complies to RoHS Directives model 75
HWS
Energy saving 150W 70
Previous model of 150W
● Reducing power loss during operation through high efficient 65
Saves 60
design. 3.3 5 12 15 24 48
19W Output voltage
● Fan will stop during output "OFF" initiated by remote ON/OFF.
User-friendly
Exhaust type forced air cooling using built-in fans
installed at the rear of the unit (300W - 1800W ) Miniature Package Miniaturization of over 50%
No space is required at the
By increasing efficiency
side between power supplies 150W Previous
model
1500W Previous
model
and optimization of compo-
when multiple units are used.
nets and circuit design, we
Built-in automated speed
achieved over 50% miniatur-
control fan contribute to low
ization.
acoustic noise during normal 42±1
126.5±1
temperature operation.
Unified style
Unified style of 82mm height make it more
convenient in design when multiple units Fit in
Fit in 1
19-inch
9-inch 2U
2U rrack
ack m
mount
ount H82mm
are used. All models can be embedded in
19-inch 2U rack mount
Safety
Reliability design Safety design
Long Life High efficiency design Designed to meet worldwide safety regula-
105° long life elec. capacitors are Synchronous rectification circuit tion. It also meet the requirement for CE
CEマーキング
UL508/CSA C22.2 No.14-M95 （低電圧指令適合）
used and design to operate for is used in 3.3V/5V output to sup- marking, which is a safety standard in Euro-
24 hours/365 days continously port lower voltage higher current. pean Union.
using guranteed life time from These products achieved more UL60950-1/CSA C22.2
No.60950-1 EN50178
component manufacturers. than 80% efficiency

Warranty: 5 years
1 2
Safety terminal HWS1000 - 1800 featured red
marking on the + side and black
Previously, cover was required to marking on the - of the output
terminal. This reduce the pos-
ensure safety in the terminal. With sibility of incorrect connection
safety terminal, life areas are cov- Live area, terminal screw are covered. Terminal structure with integrated screw
Safety terminal does not require terminal cover inserting round crimp terminal
ered by terminal block and direct
3 4
contact with finger can be prevented (finger protection).
With integral construction between screw and terminal, it will
prevent the screw from dropping off into the unit (300W -
1800W type are using input terminal) Terminal are tightened with screwdriver. safety is assured even without terminal
Screw cannot fall out or loss cover
Safe operation 0 The momentary voltage drop (voltage sag) power supply fault that
-10
While swicthing power supply may occur due to certain natural disaster or lightning is a critical issue
Voltage sags (%)
-20
provide stable DC power, there -30

for semiconductor factories and semiconductor manufacturing equip-
-40
are environmental condition -50 ment. The supply voltage sag (voltage drop) and duration is stipulated
-60
requirement that unique to the -80
by the SEMIF47-0200, " Specification For Semiconductor Processing
SEMI F47-0200 range
different fields in which equip- -100 Equipment Voltage Sag Immunity" standard which is a US semicondu-
50 200 500 1000
ment is used. times [ms] tor equipment standard and can be met when 200VAC input is used.
3
HWS Series
HWS/ME
Era where standard power supply used in medical application
AC/DC Switching power supply for
medical application
Line up
P51
Medical safety standard (EN60601/UL60601) Main applications

compliance
Medical lasers, Diagnosis equip-
Contribute to shortened the time needed in develop- X-Ray, ments,
ing medical equipment and reduce its cost Microwave thera- Analysis/testing
phy equipment devices
7 models with 42 line ups
Leakage current: max. 0.5mA
100VAC(Typ): 0.2mA/30∼150W、0.15mA/300W、0.12mA/600W、 0.2mA/1000∼1500W
230VAC(Typ): 0.4mA/30∼150W、0.39mA/300W、0.34mA/600W、 0.4mA/1000∼1500W
EMC
● Immunity (All models)
Items Standard Compliance Level Notes
Level3 Aerial discharge: 8kV
Electrostatic lEC61000-4-2 (Level 2,3 for Contact discharge:6kV
300W, 600W) (4kV for 1500W)
Radiated susceptibility lEC61000-4-3 Level 3 10V/m
Electrical fast transient/burst lEC61000-4-4 Level 3 2kV
Common: 4.0kV
Surge lEC61000-4-5 Level 3,4
Differential mode: 2.0kV
Conducted susceptibility lEC61000-4-6 Level 3 10V
Power frequency magnetic field lEC61000-4-8 Level 4 30A/m
Voltage dips. Short interuption lEC61000-4-11 Complied
● Emission (HWS30,50,100,150,300/ME) ● Emission (HWS 600,1500/ME)

Test items Standard Notes Test items Standard Notes
Radiated electric field EN55022/EN55011,FCC,VCCI Class B Compliance Radiated electric field EN55022/EN55011,FCC,VCCI Class A Compliance
Conducted emissions EN55022/EN55011,FCC,VCCI Class B Compliance Conducted emissions EN55022/EN55011,FCC,VCCI Class A Compliance
Conducted harmonics IEC61000-3-2 Conformed Conducted harmonics IEC61000-3-2 Conformed
Flicker IEC61000-3-3 Conformed Flicker IEC61000-3-3 Conformed
Attention:
Please read the instruction manual carefully before using this product. On top of the following condition, please refer to to "HWS Series" standard instruction manual (p25-).
Please confirm whether there is insulation materials used inside the equipment (whether there is patient direct contact or indirect contact with the equipment). All models are
approved for basic insulation, therefore additional insulation circuit may be needed in the equipment.
HWS/HD
Harsh environment applications
AC/DC Standard switching power supply
for rugged and heavy duty
Line up
P31
-40℃ Start up Main applications
PCB coating
LED display Process Factory
Designed to meet MIL-STD-810F Device control machinery
(shock and vibration)
4
HWS HWS1000
Single Output 15W-1800W
HWS600 HWS300
HWS
HWS1800T HWS1500
HWS15/A
5
warranty
E
A
R
S
HWS30/A HWS50/A HWS80/A HWS100/A HWS150/A
■ Features ■ Model naming method
HWS HD
● Environmentally-friendly: Conforming to RoHS direc- 〔HWS15-150〕
tives.
HWS 50 − 5 / □ □
High-efficiency technology reduces power loss Series name Output power Blank: Without cover
by heat generation. Fan stopping in power-off by A: With cover
external control reduces acoustic noise and saves R: Remote ON/OFF control
(HWS15 & HWS30 excluded)
energy. RA: Remote ON/OFF control, with cover
(HWS15 & HWS30 excluded)
● Easy to use: All models in the same hight of
ADIN: DIN rail mountable
82mm. Mountable in 2U-height racks without dead (24Vout of 15-150W models with cover only)
Note: Requesting approval for safety standards
space. should be made with HWS**-24/A.
● Safety and reliability: “Safety terminal” cover- Nominal output voltage
ex. 3: 3.3V, 5: 5V, 48: 48V
ing current flowing part secures safety for users.
〔HWS300-1800〕
“No screw-dropping”design prevents from losing
HWS 300 − 5 / □ □
HWS ME
screws during maintenance operation.
Series name Output power
● HWS1500-48 achieves high efficiency as 90%. Blank: With cover,
forced air cooling with built-in fan
Synchronous rectifier circuit improved efficiency of PV: Output voltage adjustable by external
voltage 12Vout+ models for HWS300,
low voltage models by over 10% (HWS150-5). 600 only.
(Supported by standard models for
HWS1000 and above.)
■ Applications Nominal output voltage
ex. 3: 3.3V, 5: 5V, 48: 48V
■ Conformity to RoHS Directive

This means that, in conformity with EU Directive 2002/95/
EC, lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, and
specific bromine-based flame retardants, PBB and PBDE,
HWS-P
have not been used, except for exempted applications.
■ Product Line up
Output 15W 30W 50W 80W 100W 150W
Voltage Output Current Model Output Current Model Output Current Model Output Current Model Output Current Model Output Current Model
3.3V 3A HWS15-3 6A HWS30-3 10A HWS50-3 16A HWS80-3 20A HWS100-3 30A HWS150-3
5V 3A HWS15-5 6A HWS30-5 10A HWS50-5 16A HWS80-5 20A HWS100-5 30A HWS150-5
12V 1.3A HWS15-12 2.5A HWS30-12 4.3A HWS50-12 6.7A HWS80-12 8.5A HWS100-12 13A HWS150-12
15V 1A HWS15-15 2A HWS30-15 3.5A HWS50-15 5.4A HWS80-15 7A HWS100-15 10A HWS150-15
24V 0.65A HWS15-24 1.3A HWS30-24 2.2A HWS50-24 3.4A HWS80-24 4.5A HWS100-24 6.5A HWS150-24
Instruction Manual
48V 0.33A HWS15-48 0.65A HWS30-48 1.1A HWS50-48 1.7A HWS80-48 2.1A HWS100-48 3.3A HWS150-48
300W 600W 1000W 1500W 1800W

Output
Voltage Output Current Output Current Output Current Output Current（※） Output Current
Model Model Model Model Model
(Peak) (Peak) (Peak) (Peak) (Peak)
3.3V 60A HWS300-3 120A HWS600-3 200A HWS1000-3 300A/300A HWS1500-3 300A HWS1800T-3
5V 60A HWS300-5 120A HWS600-5 200A HWS1000-5 300A/300A HWS1500-5 300A HWS1800T-5
6V − − − − 167A HWS1000-6 250A/250A (300A) HWS1500-6 250A (300A) HWS1800T-6
7.5V − − − − 134A (160A) HWS1000-7 200A/200A (240A) HWS1500-7 200A (240A) HWS1800T-7
12V 27A HWS300-12 53A HWS600-12 88A (100A) HWS1000-12 125A/125A HWS1500-12 125A (150A) HWS1800T-12
15V 22A HWS300-15 43A HWS600-15 70A (80A) HWS1000-15 100A/100A HWS1500-15 100A (120A) HWS1800T-15
24V 14A (16.5A) HWS300-24 27A (31A) HWS600-24 46A (58.5A) HWS1000-24 65A/70A（105A） HWS1500-24 75A (105A) HWS1800T-24
36V − − − − 30.7A (39A) HWS1000-36 42A/46.5A（70A） HWS1500-36 50A (70A) HWS1800T-36
48V 7A HWS300-48 13A HWS600-48 23A (29.2A) HWS1000-48 32A/32A HWS1500-48 37.5A (52.5A) HWS1800T-48
60V − − − − 18.4A (23.4A) HWS1000-60 25.6A/28A (42A) HWS1500-60 30A (42A) HWS1800T-60
（100Vin / 200Vin）
・All specifications are subject to change without notice.
（※）
7
HWS 100
HWS100 Specifications(Read instruction manual carefully, before using the power supply unit.)
MODEL HWS100-3 HWS100-5 HWS100-12 HWS100-15 HWS100-24 HWS100-48
ITEMS/UNITS
Voltage Range (*2) V AC85 - 265 or DC120 - 370
HWS
Frequency (*2) Hz 47 - 63
Power Factor (100/200VAC)(typ) (*1) 0.98 / 0.90 0.99 / 0.95
Input Efficiency (100/200VAC)(typ) (*1) ％ 78 / 81 83 / 86 84 / 87
Current (100/200VAC)(typ) (*1) A 0.9 / 0.45 1.3 / 0.65
Inrush Current (100/200VAC)(typ) (*3) A 14 / 28, Ta=25℃, cold start
Leakage Current (*10) mA Less than 0.5. (0.2 (typ) at 100VAC / 0.4 (typ) at 230VAC)
Nominal Voltage VDC 3.3 5 12 15 24 48
Maximum Current A 20 8.5 7 4.5 2.1
Maximum Power W 66 100 102 105 108 100.8
Maximum Line Regulation (*5) mV 20 48 60 96 192
Maximum Load Regulation (*6) mV 40 96 120 192 384
Output
Temperature Coefficient Less than 0.02% / ℃
Maximum Ripple & Noise (0≤Ta≤70℃)(*4) mVp-p 120 150 200
Maximum Ripple & Noise (−10≤Ta< 0℃)(*4) mVp-p 160 180 240
HWS HD
Hold-up Time (typ) (*9) ms 20

Voltage Adjustable Range VDC 2.97 - 3.96 4.0 - 6.0 9.6 - 14.4 12.0 - 18.0 19.2 - 28.8 38.4 - 52.8
Over Current Protection (*7) A >21.0 >8.92 >7.35 >4.72 >2.20
Over Voltage Protection (*8) VDC 4.13 - 4.95 6.25 - 7.25 15.0 - 17.4 18.8 - 21.8 30.0 - 34.8 55.2 - 64.8
Remote Sensing Possible
Function Remote ON/OFF Control Possible (/R Option)
Parallel Operation -
Series Operation Possible
Line DIP Built to meet SEMI-F47 (200VAC Line only)
Operating Temperature (*11) ℃ -10 to +70 (-10 to +50: 100%, +60: 60%, +70: 20%)
Storage Temperature ℃ -30 to +85
Operating Humidity ％RH 30 - 90 (No dewdrop)
Storage Humidity ％RH 10 - 95 (No dewdrop)
Environment
At no operating, 10 - 55Hz (sweep for 1min) 19.6m/s² constant,
Vibration
X, Y, Z 1hour each.
HWS ME
Shock (In package) Less than 196.1m/s²

Cooling Convection cooling
Input - FG : 2kVAC (20mA), Input - Output : 3kVAC (20mA)
Withstand Voltage
Isolation Output - FG : 500VAC (100mA) for 1min
Isolation Resistance More than 100MΩ at 25℃ and 70%RH Output - FG : 500VDC
Approved by UL60950-1, CSA C22.2 No.60950-1, EN60950-1, EN50178 UL508 (with cover models only),
Safety Standards (*12)
CSA C22.2 No.14-M95 (with cover models only) Built to meet, DENAN
PFHC Built to meet IEC61000-3-2
Standards
EMI Built to meet EN55011/EN55022-B, FCC-B, VCCI-B
Built to meet IEC61000-4-2(Level 2,3), -3(Level 3), -4(Level 3),
Immunity
-5(Level 3,4), -6(Level 3), -8(Level 4), -11
Weight (typ) g 450
Mechanical
Size (W x H x D) mm 28 x 82 x 160 (Refer to outline drawing)
(*1) At 100/200VAC, Ta=25℃ and maximum output power.

(*2) For cases where conformance to various safety specs (UL, CSA, EN) are required, to be described as 100 - 240VAC (50/60Hz).
HWS-P
(*3) Not applicable for the in-rush current to noise filter for less than 0.2ms.
(*4) Measure with JEITA RC-9131A probe, bandwidth of scope :100MHz. ●Recommended EMC Filter
(*5) 85 - 265VAC, constant load.
(*6) No load-Full load, constant input voltage.
(*7) Constant current limit and hiccup with automatic recovery.
Not operate at over load or dead short condition for more than 30 seconds.
(*8) OVP circuit will shutdown output, manual reset (re power on).
(*9) At 100/200VAC, nominal output voltage and maximum output current.
(*10) Measured by the each measuring method of UL, CSA, EN and DENAN (at 60Hz). RSEL-2002W
(*11) Ratings - Derating at standard mounting. Please refer to "TDK-Lambda
- Load (%) is percent of maximum output power or maximum output current, whichever is greater. EMC Filters" catalog.
Instruction Manual
- As for other mountings, refer to derating curve

(*12) As for DENAN, built to meet at 100VAC.
16 ・All specifications are subject to change without notice.

HWS 100
Outline Drawing
【HWS100】
REMOTE ON/OFF CONTROL CONNECTOR (SEE NOTE A)
HWS
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
2-M3 TAPPED HOLES
LED SCREW PENETRATION DEPTH MAX. 6mm
COVER
(OPTION)
HWS HD
(WITHOUT COVER)
(WITH COVER)
2-M3 EMBOSSED, TAPPED AND COUNTERSUNK HOLES
SCREW PENETRATION DEPTH MAX. 6mm
NAME PLATE
HWS ME
unit
NOTES
Recommended Solderless Terminal
Terminal A : REMOTE ON/OFF CONTROL CONNECTOR --- OPTION B2B-XH-AM (JST)
Qty（max） MATCHING HOUSING : XHP-2 (JST)
2 pcs MATCHING TERMINAL : BXH-001T-P0.6 (JST) OR SXH-001T-P0.6 (JST)
HAND CRIMPING TOOL : YC-110R (JST) OR YRS-110 (JST)
1 pc
Others 2 pcs
ACCESSORIES
＊SHORT PIECE (NET 2) FOR SHORTING PURPOSE

(+S to +V, -S to -V): MOUNTED AT TIME OF SHIPMENT.
Output Derating
HWS-P
120 120
MOUNTING A MOUNTING A
100 100
MOUNTING B, C, D MOUNTING B, C, D
（％）
（％）
80 80
LORD
LORD
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Instruction Manual
Ta（℃） Ta（℃）
MOUNTING A MOUNTING B
(STANDARD MOUNTING）
DON’
T USE
MOUNTING C MOUNTING D
・All specifications are subject to change without notice. 17

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
HWS 15 -150 Series Instruction Manual
BEFORE USING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT
HWS
Pay attention to all warnings and cautions before using the unit. Notes for HWS30-150/ME IEC/EN/UL60601-1
Incorrect usage could lead to an electric shock, damage to the
unit or a fire hazard. Notes
WARNING and CAUTION ● The product should be completely enclosed in the application
according to the specifications, and contact to the I/O part
● Do not modify. with the patient be limited. Be careful when designing the out-
● Do not touch the internal components, they may have high line. Please refer to section 16, IEC/EN/UL60601-1.
voltage or high temperature. You may get electric shock or ● This product is not suitable for the use of the combustible nar-
burned. cotic that oxygen or the nitrous oxide mixed.
● When the unit is operating, keep your hands and face away ● It is necessary to fuse it in two poles of the main power sup-
from it, you may get injured by an accident. ply in the overall equipment into which this product is built ex-
● This power supply is primarily designed and manufactured to cluding the permanent installation type equipment defined by
HWS HD
be used and enclosed in other equipment. Stick the WARN- IEC/EN/UL60601-1 section 57.6. The fuse is installed in the
ING label for users on the system equipment and describe monopole of the input of this product (live line).
the notice in the instruction manual. ● Between I/O of this product is evaluated as the basic insula-
● Never operate the unit under over current or shorted condition by IEC/EN/UL60601-1. Please add further insulation for
tions for long time, which could result in damage or insulation safe contact to the output part.
failure. There is no possibility for fire or burning. ● Please refer to local regulations for the disposal of the product
● Confirm connections to input/output terminals are correct as that passes the life.
indicated in the instruction manual. ● The leake current of this product in normal condition is 500uA
● Do not use the product in the environment with strong elec- or less. (At input voltage 230VAC.) The unit is suitable for
tromagnetic field, corrosive gas and conductive substance. medical equipment as provided by IEC/EN/UL60601-1. In
the application according to the UL60601 requirement, it is
assumed that surfaces of all equipment is assembled with the
Note : CE MARKING
insulating materials.
CE Marking, when applied to a product covered by this hand-
● This product is not evaluated by IEC/EN/UL60601-1-2(EMC).
book, indicates compliance with the low voltage directive
HWS ME
However, EMC test data is available at TDK-Lambda.
(73/23/EEC) as modified by the CE Marking Directive (93/68/
EEC) which complies with EN60950
1. Terminal Explanation
HWS15, HWS30, HWS50

① ＋Ｖ: ＋Output terminal
(Standard type: 10A max./terminal)
HWS-P
9 ② −Ｖ: −Output terminal
6 (Standard type: 10A max./terminal)

8
③ FG: Frame Ground
7
④ Ｌ: Input terminal Live line (Fuse in line)
1 ⑤ Ｎ: Input terminal Neutral line
2 ⑥ Output voltage adjustment trimmer
⑦ Output monitoring indicator (Green LED)
3
4 HWS50/R＊ (Option)
5 ⑧ −Ｒ: Remote ON/OFF control (HWS50: Option)
⑨ ＋Ｒ: Remote ON/OFF control (HWS50: Option)
Instruction Manual
Connector (JST) for Remote ON/OFF control
Connector Housing Terminal Pin

B2B-XH-AM (LF) XHP-2 BXH-001T-P0.6 or SXH-001T-P0.6

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
HWS80, HWS100, HWS150
① ＋Ｖ: ＋Output terminal
10
8 (30A max./terminal, M4 screw)
11 ② −Ｖ: −Output terminal
9
(30A max./terminal, M4 screw)
6
HWS
③ FG: Frame Ground
1 ④ Ｌ: Input terminal Live line (Fuse in line)
⑤ Ｎ: Input terminal Neutral line
2
⑥ ＋Ｓ: ＋Remote sensing terminal
7 ⑦ −Ｓ: −Remote sensing terminal
3 ⑧ Output voltage adjustment trimmer
⑨ Output monitoring indicator (Green LED)
4
5 HWS80/R＊, HWS100/R＊, HWS150/R＊ (Option)
⑩ −Ｒ: Remote ON/OFF control (Option)
⑪ ＋Ｒ: Remote ON/OFF control (Option)
＊Connector (JST) for Remote ON/OFF control
Connector Housing Terminal Pin

HWS HD
B2B-XH-AM (LF) XHP-2 BXH-001T-P0.6 or SXH-001T-P0.6
2. Terminal connecting method

● Input must be off when making connection. ● Remote ON/OFF control lines shall be twisted or use shield-
● Connect FG terminal to ground terminal of the equipment. ed wire.
● The output load line and input line shall be separated and ● Use the output connector specified in outline drawing. Also,
twisted to improve noise sensitivity. use recommended crimping tool.
● Remote sensing lines shall be twisted or use shielded wire.
HWS15, HWS30, HWS50 HWS80, HWS100, HWS150

Basic connection (Local sensing) Remote sensing connection
HWS ME
Connect“+S”terminal to“+V”terminal, Connect“+S”terminal to“+V”terminal

and“-S”terminal to“-V”terminal with the of load, and“-S”terminal to“-V”output
attached short pieces. terminal of load with wires. When remote
sensing terminals are opened, output is shut
+ down.
Load
-
+ +
Load Load
- -
HWS-P
3. Explanation of Functions and Precautions

within +/- 20% (3.3V: +20% /-10% , 48V: +10%/-20%) of
Input Voltage Range nominal output voltage. To turn the trimmer clockwise, the
Instruction Manual
Input voltage range is single phase 85-265VAC (47-63Hz) output voltage will be increased. Note over voltage protec-
or 120-370VDC. Input voltage which is out of specification tion (OVP) function may trigger if the output voltage is in-
may cause unit damage. For cases where conformance to creased excessively.
various safety specs (UL, CSA, EN) are required, to be de-
scribed as 100-240VAC (50/60Hz).
Inrush Current
This series uses Power Thermistor to protect the circuit
Output Voltage Range from Inrush Current. Please carefully select input switch
V.ADJ trimmer on the front panel side can adjust the and fuse in cases of the high temperature and the power
output voltage within the range. Output voltage range is re-input.

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
Over Voltage Protection (OVP)
Power Load
Supply
The OVP function (inverter shut down method, manual
reset type) is provided. When OVP triggers, the output will Coaxial Cable Oscillo-
1.5m 50Ω R scope
be shut down. The input shall be removed for a few min-
HWS
R:50Ω 100MHz
utes, and then re-input for recovery of the output. OVP set- C
C:4700pF
ting shall be fixed and not to be adjusted externally. Never
apply more than rated output voltage to output terminal,
which may lead damage. In the case of inductive load, use
Series Operation
decoupling diode at output line. For series operation, either method (A) or (B) is possible.
Method
（A） Method
（B）
+V +V +
Over Current Protection (OCP) Power
supply
Power
supply Load
-V -V -
Constant current limiting and Hiccup (except HWS15, Load
HWS30, which characterized fold back), automatic recov- +V +V +
Power Power
Load
ery. OCP function operates when the output current ex- supply
-V
supply
-V -
HWS HD
ceeds 105 % of maximum output current on specification.
（Note1）
The output will automatically recovered when the overload
condition is canceled. Never operate the unit under over
Note : In case of (A), please connect diodes to prevent the
current or shorted conditions for more than 30 seconds, reverse voltage.
which could result in damage.
Parallel Operation
Remote Sensing (+S, -S terminal)
（A）Operation to increase the Output Current is not pos-
(For HWS80, HWS100, HWS150)
sible.
This function compensates voltage drop of wiring from （B）Operation as a Backup Power Supply is possible as
output terminals to load terminals. Connect“+S”terminal follows.
to“+V”terminal of load and“-S”terminal to“-V”termi- 1. Set the power supply output voltage higher by the
HWS ME
nal of load with sensing wires. The total line voltage drop amount of forward voltage drop (VF) of the diode.
(+ side line and - side line) shall be less than 0.3V. In case 2. Please adjust the output voltage of each power
that sensing line is too long, it is necessary to put an elec- supply to be the same.
trolytic capacitor in following 3 places; 3. Please use within the specifications for output volt-
1) Across the load terminal, age and output current.
2) Between“+S”terminal and“+V”terminal, +V +V
Power Power
Supply Load Supply Load
3) Between“-S”terminal and“-V”terminal. -V -V
If remote sensing terminals are opened, the output will rise
+V +V
and OVP may be triggered. Power Power
Supply Supply
-V -V
+S
（A）（B）
+
+V + Remote ON/OFF Control
HWS-P
Power + Load
Supply
-V -
( HWS50 - 150 Optional Spec.)
+ Remote ON/OFF control function is available as option
-S
with model name followed by /R. Using this function al-
lows the user to turn the output on and off without having
Output Ripple & Noise to turn the AC input on and off. It is controlled by the volt-
The standard specification for maximum ripple value is age applied to +R and -R. This circuit is in the Secondary
measured according to measurement circuit specified by (output) side of the power supply unit. Do not connect in
JEITA RC-9131A. When load lines are longer, ripple will the Primary (input) side. And this circuit is isolated from
Instruction Manual
become larger. In this case, electrolytic capacitor, film the output by a photocoupler.
capacitor, etc. might be necessary to use across the load PowerSupply ＋R SW
terminal. The output ripple cannot be measure accurately if 1ｋΩ R
the probe ground lead of oscilloscope is too long. E

−R
For start up at low ambient temperature and low voltage,
output ripple noise of HWS15, HWS30 might not meet The control mode is shown below.
specification. However, there is no overshoot at start up ＋ R & − R terminal condition output condition External voltage level：E External resistance：R
and output ripple noise specification can be met after one SWON（Higher than 4.5V） ON 4.5 ∼ 12.5VDC No required
second. SWOFF（Lower than 0.8V） OFF 12.5 ∼ 24.5VDC 1.5kΩ

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
testing withstand voltage, set current limit of withstand
Isolation Test voltage test equipment at 20mA (Output-FG : 100mA).
Isolation resistance between output and FG shall be more The applied voltage must be gradually increased from zero
than 100MΩ at 500VDC. For safety, voltage setting of to testing value and then gradually decreased for shut
DC isolation tester must be done before the test. Ensure down. When timer is used, the power supply may be dam-
HWS
that it is fully discharged after the test. aged by high impulse voltage at timer switch on and off.
Output∼FG
Connect input and output as follows.
（L） +S
AC
AC
（N） +V Withstand
Voltage （L） +S
AC （L） +S
AC
-V Tester
AC
（N） +V AC
（N） +V
-S -V -V
Isolation
Tester +R -S Withstand -S
FG Voltage
-R +R Tester +R
FG FG
-R -R
500VDC, 100MΩ or more
Input-FG：solid line Output-FG

2.0kVAC, 1min（20mA） 500VAC, １min
（100mA）
Withstand Voltage Input-Output：dotted line
3.0kVAC, 1min
HWS HD
This series is designed to withstand 3.0kVAC between

input and output, 2.0kVAC between input and FG and
500VAC between output and FG each for 1 minute. When
4. Mounting Directions
Output Derating according to the Output Derating
Mounting Directions (A) Standard Mounting Direction (Open frame)
Recommended standard mounting is method (A). Method (%)

(B), (C) and (D) are also possible. Refer to the derat- 100
HWS ME
ing below. Please do not use installation method (E),

80
Output Current
where the PCB will be on the topside and heat will be

trapped inside the unit. In the following derating curve, the 60
maximum output current is considered to be 100% .
Standard Mounting
（A） 40
20
0
Standard Not Possibl -10 0 20 40 50 60 70
Mounting （B）（C）（D）（E）
（A）
Ambient Temperature (℃ )
HWS-P
Open Frame (Without Cover)

Model HWS15 HWS30 HWS50 HWS80, HWS100 HWS150
Amb. Temp. A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
−10 to ＋30℃ 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
40℃ 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 90
50℃ 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 60 100 80 80 80 100 80 80 80
60℃ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 20 20 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Instruction Manual
70℃ 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 − − 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
With Cover ( /RA Option)

Model HWS15 HWS30 HWS50 HWS80, HWS100 Model HWS150
Amb. Temp. A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D Amb. Temp. A B C D
−10 to ＋30℃ 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 −10 to ＋25℃ 100 100 100 100
40℃ 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 60 100 80 80 80 40℃ 100 76 76 76
50℃ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 20 20 60 60 60 60 50℃ 60 60 60 60
60℃ 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 − − 20 20 20 20 60℃ 20 20 20 20

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
Mounting Method 15mm or more 15mm or more
Air flow
（1）This is convection cooling type power supply. In the
consideration for the heat radiation and safety. Please
take a distance more than 15mm between the power Sheet Metal
HWS
supply and the peripheral parts. When lining up mul- Provide punching, etc. to allow air to pass.
tiple units, please make sure to place them 15mm or
more apart from each other.
Be sure to insert the insulating spacer（MIN 5mm) on component
the component side of without-cover models. side
（2）The maximum allowable penetration of mounting
screws is 6mm. Min. 5mm of clearance
（3）Recommended torque for mounting screw

HWS15-150（M3 screw）：0.49N･m（5.0kgf･cm）
HWS HD
5. Wiring Method
● The output load line and input line shall be separated ● In HWS15-50, the output current of each output termi-
and twisted to improve noise sensitivity. nal is limited to 10A.
● The sensing lines shall be twisted and separated from the ● In HWS80-150, the output current of each output termi-
output lines. nal is limited to 30A.
● Use all lines as thick and short as possible to make ● For safety and EMI considerations, connect the FG termi-
lower impedance. nal of HWS15-150 to mounting set ground terminal.
● Noise can be eliminated by attaching a capacitor to the ● The recommended wire type :
load terminals.
Recommended Recommended crimp-type terminal

MODEL Recommended torque
HWS ME
wire Mounting
D（MAX）（
t MAX） piece（MAX）
M3.5 Screws
HWS15 ー 50 AWG14-22 6.8mm 0.8mm ２ pieces
1.0N･m（9.8kgf･cm）- 1.4N･m（13.7kgf･cm）
φ t
AWG12-22 M4 Screws 1.0mm 1 piece
8.1mm
HWS80,100 AWG12-22 1.2N･m（11.8kgf･cm）- 1.6N･m（15.6kgf･cm） 0.8mm ２ pieces
M3.5 Screws
AWG14-22 6.8mm 0.8mm ２ pieces
1.0N･m（9.8kgf･cm）- 1.4N･m（13.7kgf･cm）
AWG10-22 M4 Screws 1.0mm 1 piece
8.1mm
HWS150 AWG10-22 1.2N･m（11.8kgf･cm）- 1.6N･m（15.6kgf･cm） 0.8mm ２ pieces
M3.5 Screws
AWG14-22 6.8mm 0.8mm ２ pieces
1.0N･m（9.8kgf･cm）- 1.4N･m（13.7kgf･cm）
Note 1 : When using separate loads, use of two pcs. of 0.8mm thick crimp-type terminal is recommended.
Note 2 : For recommended diameter, refer to wire maker recommended allowable current and voltage drop.
Especially, for 3V or 5V models, output current is large. Thick diameter wire is recommended.
HWS-P
6. External Fuse Rating
Refer to the following fuse rating when selecting the exter- according to input current (rms.) values under the actual
nal fuses that are to be used on input line. Surge current load condition.
flows when line turns on. Use slow-blow fuse or time-lug
fuse. Do not use fast-blow fuse. Fuse rating is specified by HWS15, HWS50：2A HWS30, HWS80, HWS100：3.15A
in-rush current value at line turn-on. Do not select the fuse HWS150：5A
Instruction Manual

HWS 15, 30, 50, 80, 100, 150
7. Before concluding that the unit is at fault…

Before concluding that the unit is at fault, make the follow- ● Audible noise can be heard during Dynamic-Load opera-
ing checks. tion.
HWS
● Check if the rated input voltage is connected. ● Audible noise can be heard when input voltage wave-
● Check if the wiring of input and output is correct. form is not sinusoidal wave.
● Check if the wire size is not too thin. ● Ensure that a large capacitor is not connected on the
● Check if the output voltage control (V.ADJ) is properly output side. Please use within maximum capacitance
adjusted. shown below.
● Check if the Remote ON/OFF control connector is not
opened, when use Remote ON/OFF control function.
● Check if the output current and output wattage dose not
exceed specification.
Maximum external capacitance

MODEL
HWS HD
3.3V 5V 12V 15V 24V 48V

HWS15 10,000uF 5,000uF 2,000uF 1,000uF 500uF
HWS30, HWS50 10,000uF 5,000uF 2,000uF 500uF
HWS80, HWS100, HWS150 10,000uF 5,000uF 1,000uF
8. Range of free warranty

Conditions of usage at the free of charge warranty are as Following cases are not covered by warranty.
follows. ● Improper usage like dropping products, applying shock
● Average operating temperature (ambient temperature of and defects from operation exceeding specification of
HWS ME
the power supply unit) is under 40ºC. the units.

● Average load factor is 80% or less. ● Defects resulting from natural disaster (fire, flood).
● Installation method : Standard installation. ● Unauthorized modifications or repair by the buyers
However, the maximum rating is within the output defects not cause by TDK-Lambda.
derating.
HWS-P
Instruction Manual

Usage Precautions
● Use only the fuses specified or recommended by TDK-Lambda

WARNING for external fuses.
● This product is designed and manufactured as a component part
● Do not modify, disassemble, or open this product. Failure to do to be installed in electronic de-vices. Attach the warning label to
so can cause electric shock hazard. TDK-Lambda cannot be the unit and insert the notes in the instruction manual.
held responsible for damage caused by modifications to this ● Malfunction and failure may be caused if this product is used in
product. a strong electromagnetic field.
● Internal voltage can be retained inside the product. Do not touch ● Failure may be caused in the power supply unit due to corrosion
any parts inside the product be-cause there can be high-voltage if used in environments with corrosive gas (hydrogen sulfide,
and high-temperature parts even when the electric current is not sulfur dioxide, etc.).
applied. This can cause an electric shock hazard or burn injury. ● Malfunction and failure may be caused if this product is used in
● There can be high-voltage and high-temperature parts even in environments with conductive sub-stances or dust.
products without a cover. Do not touch them. Touching them can ● Be sure to take protective measures against the surge voltage
cause an electric shock hazard or burn injury. caused by lightning, etc. Damage to the unit may be caused due
● While electric current is being applied, keep your hands and face to irregular voltage.
away from it. This may cause in-jury or an unexpected accident. ● Connect the frame ground terminal of the power supply unit to
the earth terminal of the device, for safety and to reduce noise.
CAUTION If grounding is not made, it may cause an electric shock hazard.
● It is necessary to exchange consumable parts (built-in fan,
● Be sure to read the catalogue and instruction manual before electrolytic capacitor) periodically. Set an appropriate overhaul
using this product. For strictly ac-curate information, request interval period for the performance of maintenance. There
the specifications of the delivered product to check the more may be some cases where overhaul maintenance cannot be
detailed information. Incorrect usage could lead to an electric conducted due to unavailability of parts due to pro-duction
shock, damage to the product or a fire hazard. discontinuation.
● If there are differences between the specific information given ● This product might fail accidentally or through unexpected
for your product and this document, the specific information conditions. When using this product with application devices, in
given for your product has priority. which an extremely high reliability is required (Nuclear-related
● Use this product within the specified input voltage, output devices, traffic control devices, medical devices, etc.), be sure to
power, output voltage, output current, and range of ambient ensure that the fail-safe function is effec-tive in the devices.
temperature/ambient humidity. Using this product in conditions
beyond the specification limits can shorten the lifetime of the REMARKS
product, or can cause, damage to the product, electric shock, or
a fire hazard. Also, measure the temperature inside the device ● As for EMI or immunity, they are measured in the TDK-Lambda
to check that there are no problems. standard conditions. It is not guaranteed that this product meets
● Check the direction the product should face and the conditions industry standards or regulations when being used in dif-ferent
for ventilation in the specifications of the delivered product, and conditions of mounting and wiring. Assess and evaluate values
use the product in the correct manner. on the actual device before use.
● Disconnect the power input before connecting inputs and ● To export this product, follow the necessary procedures of
outputs. application for the export license by the government of Japan,
● If an internal fuse becomes burned out, do not use the unit by etc., complying with the regulations of the Foreign Exchange
replacing the fuse. This can cause trouble inside the unit. Be and Foreign Trade Control Law.
sure to request us to repair the unit. ● The information in this catalogue is subject to change without
● Insert fuses in the input circuit for products in which protection prior notice.
circuits (elements, fuses, etc.) are not installed, to prevent
smoking or burning. Also for products with protection circuits
installed inside, an appropriate use of protection circuits is
recommended as there is possibility that the in-ternal protection
circuit may not operate depending on the usage conditions.
・All specifications are subject to change without notice. HWS-0908E web101014 133
CONNECTIONS ARE OUR BUSINESS ONLINE SUPPORT GIVES YOU
AN INSTANT CONNECTION WITH US
Storm Copper Components works closely with

its customers, and our connection on the World
Wide Web gives you easy access to critical
information on electrical design, plus immediate
access to our company.
Visit www.stormcopper.com Our website includes conductivity tables,

for a complete description descriptions of our products, an inventory
of our standard ground bar list of materials we have in stock, and other Large capacitor bank assembly
assemblies. information that can help your procurement used in power generation.
and scheduling.
Flexible Busbars allow
for vibration and Storm Copper Components Co.
movement in high 240 Industrial Drive, P.O. Box 99
Layered conductors and insulators current applications. Decatur, TN 37322
create custom Busbar laminations. 1-800-394-4804
Fax: 423-334-3389
www.stormcopper.com
MANUFACTURING TO OEM SPECIFICATIONS Our materials, processes, and finished components
are engineered to meet, as needed, standards PRODUCTS Our employees understand the technicalities
of working with copper, a softer metal than
AND SERVICE REQUIREMENTS required by ASME, UL, CSA, Bellcore, and other
testing/standards bodies.
steel, and one that requires some extra care
in fabrication. And our proto-typing capability
can usually provide sample components for
Since virtually every component we make is testing in a matter of days.
Inventory That Ensures Your Technology That Maximizes custom to a particular manufacturer or application,
Component’s Availability Your Efficiency we have created a number of new cost effective
We maintain a standing inventory of a million techniques of producing connectors in both
We continually re-evaluate our production
pounds of copper bar and sheet in a variety of low and high volume production runs. X-rays help us monitor plating
processes, and we make investments in equipment
widths and thicknesses, so we can respond to make us faster and more cost-effective. Our thickness consistency.
quickly. That gives you more production strategy is to ensure your component's quality
flexibility. first, then look for ways we can make your parts
Plating
more cost effectively. Storm Copper Components developed
in-house plating capabilities so we could
Our employees understand how to work a soft metal
meet the delivery requirements of our key
Custom shapes and customers. Our original bright tin plating
like copper and keep tolerances tight.
sizes are produced
Our 400 ton CNC
Cable Assembly finish has been expanded to include
quickly and accurately tin/lead, lead and silver plating.
on our Trumph busbar press is Copper Fabrication Storm produces a full line of cable
Punching Machines. capable of making Storm Copper Components is one of the assemblies for high current applications, • Tin
up to ten components
largest copper fabricators in the United States. with a variety of lug and connector
at once. Modular options. This was our original business, • Lead
tooling allows us
Virtually all of our business is copper, and we
and it's one that continues to grow today. • Silver
to set up even offer a variety of metalworking capabilities, all
complicated designs based on CNC technology. Our equipment • Tin/Lead
in a matter of a few includes shears, presses, breaks, and
minutes, with punching machines.
minimal tool cost.
We maintain a million pounds of copper bar and

sheet inventory at all times.


and scheduling.
Fax: 423-334-3389
www.stormcopper.com
Plating
sizes are produced
Our 400 ton CNC
tooling allows us
minimal tool cost.

Plating
sizes are produced
Our 400 ton CNC
tooling allows us
minimal tool cost.



and scheduling.
Fax: 423-334-3389
www.stormcopper.com

Heat Tracing Catalog Data

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heat Tracing Catalog Data

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELECTRICAL HEAT

THERMON . . . The Heat Tracing Specialists®

European Headquarters Corporate Headquarters

Power Output Curves1 . . . Circuit Breaker Sizing and Type2 . . .

Form TEP0074U-0508 © Thermon Manufacturing Co. Information subject to change.

Canadian Standards Association

THERMON . . . The Heat Tracing Specialists®

-76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F -76°F to +131°F

Number of Power Connections 1 to 3 Cables 1 Cable 1 Cable7 n/a

Number of In-Line/T-Splices 2 to 3 Cables 2 Cables n/a 2 Cables

Maximum Rated Current 1 50 Amps 85 Amps 50 Amps n/a

T4 @ 46 Amps T4 @ 11.5 W/ft5 T4 @ 46 Amps T4 @ 46 Amps

Form TEP0088-0406 © Thermon Manufacturing Co. Printed in U.S.A.

Ú±®³ ÌÛÐððïðóðèðé w Ì¸»®³±² Ó¿²«º¿½¬«®·²¹ Ý±ò Ð®·²¬»¼ ·² ËòÍòßò

Special Note: Mounting brackets for the Interface

The POK series is based on a high-quality glass fibre-reinforced

Our assembly service can supply these enclosures preassembled

Technical data Standard ATEX

Material Glass fibre-reinforced polyester Glass fibre-reinforced polyester

Type H x W x D 75 x 80 x 55 75 x 110 x 55 75 x 160 x 55 75 x 190 x 55 75 x 230 x 55 120 x 122 x 90

Universal polyester enclosure POK 5

Height x Width x Depth mm 120 x 220 x 91

Ordering data Technical data

Earth continuity plate (ECP), cruciform

The POK series is based on a high-quality glass fibre-reinforced

Our assembly service can supply these enclosures preassembled

Technical data Standard ATEX

Material Glass fibre-reinforced polyester Glass fibre-reinforced polyester

Type H x W x D 75 x 80 x 55 75 x 110 x 55 75 x 160 x 55 75 x 190 x 55 75 x 230 x 55 120 x 122 x 90

Universal polyester enclosure POK 6

Height x Width x Depth mm 160 x 260 x 90

Ordering data Technical data

Earth continuity plate (ECP), cruciform

The POK series is based on a high-quality glass fibre-reinforced

Our assembly service can supply these enclosures preassembled

Technical data Standard ATEX

Material Glass fibre-reinforced polyester Glass fibre-reinforced polyester

Type H x W x D 75 x 80 x 55 75 x 110 x 55 75 x 160 x 55 75 x 190 x 55 75 x 230 x 55 120 x 122 x 90

Universal polyester enclosure POK 7

Height x Width x Depth mm 160 x 360 x 90

Ordering data Technical data

Earth continuity plate (ECP), cruciform

WPE 4 4 mm² WPE 4/ZZ 4 mm²

In hazardous area applications, the installation instructions

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 6.1 x 56 x 47 6.1 x 70 x 53.5

Technical data IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T

Marking systems (see assortment in catalogue 7)

WPE 6 6 mm² WPE 10 10 mm²

In hazardous area applications, the installation instructions

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 7.9 x 56 x 47 9.9 x 60 x 47

Technical data IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-2 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Marking systems (see assortment in catalogue 7)

WDU 2.5N/600 UL 2.5 mm² WDU 4 4 mm²

In hazardous area applications, the installation instructions

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 5.1 x 44 x 43.5 6.1 x 60 x 47

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Marking systems (see assortment in catalogue 7)

WDU 6 6 mm² WDU 10 10 mm²

In hazardous area applications, the installation instructions

Width/Length/height with TS35x7.5 mm 7.9 x 60 x 47 9.9 x 60 x 47

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Marking systems (see assortment in catalogue 7)

9.9 x 70 x 49.5 11.9 x 60 x 63 12 x 60 x 47